The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About02.18.09 Carmel SpecBFS RETAIL AND COMMERCIAL OPERATIONS, LLC FIRESTONE COMPLETE AUTO CARE PROJECT MANUAL (2008 L - Left Hand Modified) Address 11035 N. Michigan Rd. Zionsville, IN 46077 Property No. XXXXXX Store No.: XXXXXX Job No.: XXXXX Date: 02-18-2009 ARCHITECT SITE ENGINEER Amcon Design & Construction Co. Weihe Engineers 20633 Watertown Ct. – Suite 200 10505 College Avenue Waukesha, WI 53186 Indianapolis, IN 46280 262-717-9944 317-846-6611 Fax: 262-717-9510 Fax: 317-843-0546 TABLE OF CONTENTS Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 4 Invitation to Bid DIVISION 00 BIDDING AND CONTRACT INFORMATION I. Instructions to Bidders II. Project Document List DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01001 Standard General Conditions 01002 General Project Requirements 01003 Special Conditions/ Owner Furnished Materials 01300 Administrative Requirements 01400 Quality Requirements 01600 Product Requirements 01780 Closeout Submittals DIVISION 02 SITE WORK 02112 Clearing, Grubbing and Stripping 02200 Earthwork 02210 Site Grading 02225 Structural Excavation and Backfill 02226 Pipe Trench Excavation and Backfill 02227 Parking Lot Excavation and Backfill 02228 Site Excavation and Fill 02245 Lime Stabilized Sub-grade 02480 Landscaping 02482 Hydro-mulching New Lawns 02486 Sod Work 02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 02577 Pavement Markings 02810 Irrigation System 02882 Termite Control DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast In Place Concrete DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04065 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04811 Single Wythe Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 4 DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06067 Wood, Metal, and Plastic Surfacing Materials 06100 Rough Carpentry 06193 Plate Connected Wood Trusses 06410 Custom Cabinets DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07191 Penetrating Concrete Sealer 07210 Board and Batt Insulation – Section 07212 07211 Horizontal Cavity Loose Fill Insulation 07212 Board Insulation 07214 Foamed In Place Insulation 07270 Fire stopping Systems 07310 Asphalt Shingle Roofing 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07710 Rain Removal System 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08112 Commercial Steel Doors and Frames 08310 Access Panels and Frames 08332 Fire Doors Rolling Fire Doors 08360 Overhead Doors 08380 Traffic Doors 08410 Metal Framed Storefronts 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09685 Carpet Tiles 09770 Special Wall Surfacing 09902 Interior and Exterior Paints and Stains DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10160 Metal Toilet Compartments 10445 Door and Room Signs 10810 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NOT INCLUDED) Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 4 DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13850 Gas Detection and Alarm DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT INCLUDED) DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15000 Automatic Sprinkler Systems 15010 Supplementary Mechanical Conditions 15020 Tests and Adjustments 15050 Basic mechanical materials and Methods 15075 Mechanical Identification 15082 Piping Insulation 15086 Duct Insulation 15145 Plumbing Piping 15146 Plumbing Specialties 15212 Compressed Air System 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15430 Plumbing Equipment 15500 Dry Pipe Automatic Sprinkler Fire Protection 15540 Infrared Heaters 15810 Ducts 15820 Duct Accessories DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical Special Conditions 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16070 Hangers and Supports 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16131 Conduit 16138 Boxes 16139 Cabinets and Enclosures 16140 Wiring Devices 16155 Equipment Wiring 16195 Electrical Identification 16210 Electrical Utility Service 16412 Enclosed Switches 16426 Enclosed Contactors 16442 Distribution Switchboards 16443 Panelboards 16510 Interior Luminaires 16520 Exterior Luminaires 16721 Fire Alarm APPENDIX A Geotechnical Report Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 4 APPENDIX B Structural Calculations END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00000I - Page 1 of 3 I. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS 1. Bidding documents, including drawings and specifications, will be forwarded to all contractors that have been invited to bid. The list of invited contractors is prepared by Owner and will not be published. 2. Because it is policy not to have a public opening of bids and because management's approval must be obtained prior to awarding a contract, all bidding contractors will be notified approximately two weeks after the bid due date as to who was the successful bidder. 3. Bids for this contract shall be prepared per the instructions in the bid solicitation letter. To qualify for consideration, bid proposals must be delivered by the date and time specified in the bid solicitation letter. Fax bids are acceptable at (262) 717-9510. Follow-up with a hard copy within 48 hours of fax. 4. Bidding contractors should retain the bidding documents until Owner selects a successful contractor. Unsuccessful contractors can dispose of the documents at their convenience at that time. 5. The Bid Form includes a bid breakdown that owner requests the bidding contractor to complete. This breakdown allows owner to intelligently review the proposal. The Schedule of Values that the successful contractor must submit will be the same format as the bid breakdown. 6. Preferred Supplier Pricing, National Accounts a. Contractor shall base his bid on National Account pricing for Overhead Doors, Roof, HVAC and Heaters, and Light Fixtures. b. For the Preferred Supplier pricing, the following manufacturers representatives may be contacted: OVERHEAD DOORS (See Drawings and Section 08360) Clopay Overhead Doors INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTS AND STAINS (See drawings and section 9902) Sherwin Williams Paint MECHANICAL (See drawings) Lennox Carrier Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00000I - Page 2 of 3 York Trane RADIANT HEATERS (See Drawings) Spaceray CONCRETE SEALER – Ashford Formula (See Section 07191) Curecrete LIGHT FIXTURES & BULBS (See Drawings) GE Supply 8. Fees and Permits Firestone will reimburse Contractor for all fees and permits on a no mark up, no retention basis. Costs may be invoiced separate from progress payments. Contractor is to exclude cost of all permits and fees from bid. Contractor retains responsibility to obtain permits. Please provide estimated cost of fee/permits for our use in budgeting. Municipal inspection costs for failed inspections are part of Contractor's expense and are not reimbursable. 9. Waiver of Lien Waiver of Lien procedure and forms are attached. Submission of a waiver of lien for each subcontractor and the general contractor at the time of pay request will be made according to the attached instructions. No request for payment in excess of 25% of the full general contract amount will be accepted at any one time, hence pay requests must be scheduled to conform to this requirement. Bridgestone/Firestone reserves the right to require performance and/or payment bonds. Final unconditional waivers of lien will be required in conjunction with final contract payment. 10. TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION a. The Contractor shall begin work as soon as possible but not later than five (5) calendar days after execution of this Contract Agreement, receipt of permits, or Notice to Proceed from the Owner and shall prosecute the work diligently so as to assure Substantial Completion of the Work within the contract Performance Period including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays or the date to which the time for Substantial Completion may have been extended by change order. b. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Owner's Representative when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the contract documents, that the Owner may occupy or use the facility for the use for which it is intended and receipt of Certificate of Occupancy from the Governing Agency. d. Should the Contractor fail to substantially complete the work by the substantial completion date, he shall be deemed to be in default of this contract and the Owner shall be at liberty to immediately thereafter have the work completed and to deduct from monies owed the Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00000I - Page 3 of 3 Contractor all costs incurred in the completion of the work. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PROJECT DOCUMENTS LIST 00000II - Page 1 of 2 II. PROJECT DOCUMENT LIST The following shall constitute a complete listing of documents for this project: A. This Project Manual B. The following ( minimal ) drawing sheets T1 Index, Location, Code Data and Notes T2 Certification Sheet C. Civil Drawings - Site Survey C1 Site Development Plan C2 Site Grading Plan C3 Site Utility Plan C4 Site Utility Details and Specifications C5 Site Utility Details and Specifications D. Landscape ( For Reference ) L1 Landscape Plan and Details E. Store Planning ( For Reference ) F1 Fixture plan and Notes F2 Showroom Fixture Plan and Interior Elevations F3 Alternate Showroom Fixture Plan and Interior Elevations F. Architectural Drawings CSP Conceptual Site Plan and Sign Details A1 Floor Plan and Details A2 Reflected Ceiling and Floor Finish Plan A3 Roof Plan and Details A4 Exterior Elevations and Details A4.1 Trash Enclosure Details A5 Building Sections A6 Wall Sections and Details A7 Interior Elevations, Sections and Details A8 Room Finishes and Door Schedules A9.1 ADA Requirements A9.2 ADA Requirements G. Structural Drawings S1 Foundation Plan and Details and Notes S2 Foundation Plan and Details and Notes S3 Roof Framing Plan and Details S4 Utility Platform Plan and Details S5 Alignment Pit Details H. Mechanical Drawings Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PROJECT DOCUMENTS LIST 00000II - Page 2 of 2 M1 Mechanical Plan Notes and Schedule M2 Mechanical Details and Notes I. Electrical Drawings E1 Electrical Lighting Plan E2 Electrical Power Plan E3 Electrical Symbol List and Notes E4 Electrical Details E5 Electrical Service Diagrams and Schedules E6 Fire Alarm Plan E7 Fire Alarm Notes and Details ES1 Site Electrical Lighting Plan SP Photometric Site Plan J. Plumbing Drawings P1 Plumbing Plan and Fixture schedule P2 Air Piping Plan and Notes P3 Plumbing Diagram, details and Notes P4 Plumbing Details P5 Oil reel Piping Plan K. Fire Protection Drawings FP1 Sprinkler Plan and Risers FP2 Fire Alarm Plan and Details L. Appendix A Project Geotechnical Report M. Appendix B Structural Calculations Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx REQUEST FOR PAYMENT 00000VII - Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01001 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS MULTI-DRAW CONTRACT 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND INTERPRETATION. A. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of the Contract Agreement, Standard General Conditions, Drawings, Specifications, Special Conditions, if any, Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond, Addenda, if any, and Change Orders, if any. The Contract Documents may also be referred to collectively as the “Contract”. B. Interpretation. The Contract Documents are cumulative, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. To the extent the terms and conditions in these Standard General Conditions conflict with or materially alter any other terms or conditions found elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the terms and conditions in these Standard General Conditions shall take precedence unless such other term or condition contains an express statement that such other term or condition shall control over a part of these Standard General Conditions. To the extent that any terms and conditions offered by the Contractor conflict with or materially alter any of the terms and conditions in the Contract Documents, the terms and conditions in the Contract Documents shall take precedence. All capitalized terms used in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings ascribed to them in the Contract Agreement or these Standard General Conditions, unless the context clearly requires a different meaning. C. Ownership of Drawings and Specifications. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the number of copies of Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work (as hereinafter defined) will be furnished to Contractor by Owner, at Contractor’s expense, and shall be returned to Owner upon completion of the Work, as they remain Owner’s property. 2. WORK. A. Defined. Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, provide, perform, and complete, in the manner specified and described, and upon the terms and conditions set forth, in the Contract Documents, all of the following, all of which is herein referred to as the “Work”: i. Labor, Equipment, Materials and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the manner specified and described in the Contract Documents, all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, materials, supplies, information, data, and other means and items necessary to perform the project described in the Contract Documents at the location described in the Contract Agreement (the “Work Site”); ii. Permits. Procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations necessary in connection therewith but excluding any licenses and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities which shall be secured and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise specified; iii. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all bonds and all insurance certificates specified in the Contract Documents; iv. Taxes. Pay all applicable federal, state, and local taxes; v. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Bidder by the Contract Documents; and vi. Quality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner, consistent with highest standards of professional and construction practices, in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, the Contract Documents, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition consistent therewith, with only new, undamaged, and first quality equipment, materials, and supplies. B. Authorization for Work. Contractor shall do no Work without written authorization to proceed from Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 2 of 13 Owner. No changes shall be made in the Work written approval from Owner pursuant to Section 13 of these Standard General Conditions. 3. TIME AND SCHEDULE. A. Time is of the Essence. The time of commencement, rate of progress and time of completion of the Work are of the essence of this Contract. B. Time Schedule. Promptly upon execution of the Contract Agreement and when required by Owner, Contractor shall provide to Owner a detailed schedule of the Work showing the commencement and completion dates set forth in the Contract Agreement and the order of performance of every component of the Work, in detail reasonably acceptable to Owner. Contractor shall cooperate in arranging a schedule that will minimize interference with Owner’s operations. C. Liquidated Damages. In the case that work is not completed within the allotted time frame the Contractor will be responsible for Liquidated Damages in the amount of $750 per day. 4. WARRANTY OF WORK. A. Scope. Contractor warrants that the Work shall be free from defects and flaws in design, materials, and workmanship; shall conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and shall be fit, sufficient, and suitable for the purposes stated in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty in this Section shall be in addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which are hereby reserved to Owner. B. Length of Warranty; Repairs. Contractor shall, promptly and without charge, correct any failure to fulfill the above warranty that may be discovered or develop at any time within one year after acceptance by Owner or such longer period as may be prescribed in the Contract Documents or by law. This warranty shall be extended automatically to cover all repaired and replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty and Contractor’s obligation to correct Work shall be extended for a period of one year from the date of such repair or replacement. C. Subcontractor Warranties. Whenever the Contract Documents require a Subcontractor to provide a guaranty or warranty, Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory to Owner and assigning said warranty or guaranty to Owner. D. Owner’s Self-Help. If (i) Contractor fails to promptly make the corrections required under the warranty or (ii) Owner deems it inexpedient to correct any defects or flaws within the scope of the warranty, Owner may (a) make the corrections, with its own forces or with contract forces or (b) waive the right to require correction thereof, and, in either event, to recover the costs, expenses, losses and damages thereof by making an equitable deduction from any funds due to Contractor under the Contract, requiring Contractor to refund to Owner therefor, or by such other actions as may be authorized by Law. 5. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor will be responsible for the execution of a satisfactory and complete piece of Work, in accordance with the true intent of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the Work even though not particularly specified or indicated. Should the Contractor object to methods or materials specified, Contractor shall notify Owner in writing and obtain direction from Owner before proceeding with the Work. Proceeding with the Work by Contractor without notice to Owner shall be construed as an acceptance of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall verify conditions at the Work Site and all measurements at the Work Site and in the Contract Documents and shall be responsible for the same and shall notify Owner in writing of any Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 3 of 13 seeming errors, discrepancies or inconsistencies within the Contract Documents and between the Work Site and the Contract Documents, and shall await instructions from Owner before proceeding with the Work. Contractor shall be presumed to have examined the Work Site and the limitations under which the Work will have to be executed, as well as any underground conditions. 6. COMPLIANCE WITH PATENTS. Contractor shall pay or cause to be paid all costs, royalties, and fees arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, devices, processes, or inventions. Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold Owner harmless from all Claims relating to inventions, patents, patent rights, or other encumbrances arising out of the execution or performance of this Contract. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of any and all Claims of infringement brought against it relating to the Work and shall furnish Owner with all information and data in its possession relating to such Claims. 7. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND NOTICES. Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees, and take all other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed in accordance with the requirements of all governmental permits, licenses, or other approvals or authorizations that may be required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the Work and with all applicable Laws, including, without limitation, any Laws prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101 et seq.; any Laws respecting the assumption of liability for taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits for Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ employees; and any Laws regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the federal Fair Labor Standards Act, the federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and all regulations, standards, and orders of the United States Department of Labor. Assessment of any and all penalties against Owner resulting from Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws shall be charged to Contractor. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws. The Contractor shall call Owner’s attention to any errors, discrepancies or inconsistencies between the Contract Documents and applicable Laws. If the Contractor performs any Work contrary to such Laws, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. Nothing in this Section 7 shall in any way limit, abridge or modify the provisions of Section 21 of these Standard General Conditions. 8. INSPECTIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Owner shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. Owner shall have the right to inspect all or any part of the Work and to reject all or any part of the Work that is, in Owner’s judgment, defective or damaged or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of this Contract and Owner, without limiting its other rights or remedies, may require correction or replacement at Contractor’s cost, perform or have performed all Work necessary to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, or nonconforming and charge Contractor with any excess cost incurred thereby, or cancel all or any part of any order or this Contract. Work so rejected may be returned or held at Contractor’s expense and risk. A. Un-inspected work which has been covered up shall be uncovered, at Contractor’s cost, when so ordered by Owner. Contractor shall give timely notice of any tests or readiness of machinery or equipment to permit Owner to make inspection at source, if desired. 9. SUPERVISION. The Contractor shall keep on the Work Site, throughout the performance of the Work, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner, who shall have complete charge of the Work on behalf of Contractor. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees and Subcontractors, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 4 of 13 person or anyone not skilled in the work assigned to him. The Contractor shall conduct its operations in a manner compatible with Owner’s safety regulations, local employee practices and all Laws. If, at any time, the Work, or any component part of the Work, is delayed so as to jeopardize completion of the Work by the completion date, Contractor shall initiate immediate and definite procedures for accelerating the Work as required to bring the Work, and all component parts of the Work, into compliance. Owner shall not be subject to any claims, demands, or liability for Contractor’s acceleration damages or costs incurred to keep the Work in compliance with the completion date. 10. SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe conditions at the Work Site, including the safety of all persons and property during performance of the Work. This requirement shall apply continuously and shall not be limited to normal working hours. Contractor shall take all safety precautions as shall be necessary to comply with all applicable Laws and to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Contractor shall conduct all of its operations without interruption or interference with vehicular and pedestrian traffic on the Work Site, or on public and private rights-of-way unless it has obtained permits therefor from the proper authorities. If any public or private right-of-way shall be rendered unsafe by Contractor’s operations, Contractor shall make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as shall be acceptable to the proper authorities. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or limb or of the Work or of the Work Site or adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from Owner, is hereby permitted to act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and he shall so act, without appeal, if so instructed or authorized by Owner. Reasonable compensation for emergency work, if any, shall be determined by agreement of the parties pursuant to a Change Order under Section 13 of these Standard General Conditions. 11. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. A. Insurance. Contractor shall provide certificates and, upon request of Owner, policies of insurance evidencing the minimum insurance coverages and limits set forth below within ten (10) days following Owner’s execution of this Contract. Such policies shall be in form, and from companies, acceptable to Owner. Owner shall be named as an additional insured on such policies by endorsement to the policies listed in items 3 and 4 below. The insurance coverages and limits set forth below shall be deemed to be minimum coverages and limits and shall not be construed in any way as a limitation on Contractor’s duty to carry adequate insurance or on Contractor’s liability for losses or damages under this Contract. The minimum insurance coverages and limits that shall be maintained at all times while providing, performing, or completing the Work, including any correction of any failure to meet warranty, are as follows: i. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability. Limits shall not be less than: (a) Worker’s Compensation: statutory, (b) Employer’s Liability: $500,000 ea. accident-injury, (c) $500,000 ea. employee-disease, and (d) $500,000 disease-policy. Such insurance shall evidence that coverage applies to the states in which the Work is to be performed. ii. Comprehensive Motor Vehicle Liability. Limits for vehicles owned, non-owned or rented shall not be less than $1,000,000 bodily injury and property damage combined single limit. iii. Commercial General Liability. Limits shall not be less than $1,000,000 Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limit. Coverage is to be written on an “occurrence” basis, and shall include: (a) premises operations, (b) products/completed operations, (c) independent contractors, (d) personal injury (with employment exclusion deleted), (e) broad form property damage endorsement, (f) “X,” “C,” and “U”, and (g) contractual liability (which coverage shall specifically include the indemnification set forth in Section 12 of these Standard General Conditions). iv. Umbrella Liability. Limits shall not be less than $2,000,000 Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limit. This Policy shall apply in excess of the limits stated in 1, 2, and 3 above. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 5 of 13 v. Professional Liability (Errors and Omissions). Limits shall be not less than $1,000,000 Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined Single Limit. This Policy shall be required where architectural, engineering or other professional services are provided by or through Contractor as a part of the Work. vi. Builder’s Risk Insurance. Limits shall be not less than the insurable value of the Work at completion, including the aggregate value of Owner-furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by Contractor. This coverage shall include: (a) “all risks” of direct physical loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials used in providing, performing and completing the Work, including without limitation fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood, earth movement, and collapse, (b) equipment or materials while in warehouses, during installation, during testing, and after the Work is completed, but prior to final acceptance, (c) any period during which Owner is occupying all or part of the Work but prior to final acceptance without the need for the insurance company’s consent, and (d) Owner as Named Insured. All certificates and policies required in this Section 11 shall: (i) provide that no change, modification in, or cancellation of any insurance shall become effective until the expiration of 30 days after written notice shall have been given by the insurance company to Owner, and (ii) be primary and not entitled to contribution from any insurance maintained by Owner. B. Subcontractor Insurance. All Subcontractors shall provide the insurance required by Paragraphs 1, 2, 3 and 5 (when 5 is applicable) of Section 11.B above, except as otherwise expressly required or allowed by Owner. 12. INDEMNIFICATION. Contractor shall indemnify, save harmless, and defend Owner against any and all Claims that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with Contractor’s performance of, or failure to perform, the Work or any part thereof, whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault of Contractor, except that such obligation of Contractor shall not apply where the Laws of the state in which the Work is performed require that such obligation of Contractor shall not apply to any Claims to the extent that such Claim is that caused by the sole negligence of Owner. 13. CHANGES. Owner shall have the right, by written order executed by Owner, to make changes in the Contract, the Work, the Work Site, and the Contract Time (“Change Order”). If any Change Order causes an increase or decrease in the amount of the Work, an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time may be made. The amount of any Change Order shall be determined on the same unit basis (exclusive of overhead and profit) as similar work originally included in the Contract, with fair allowance being made for any change in basic material prices or labor hourly rate paid by Contractor, using the same percentage of profit and overhead as originally used in the Contract. Where unit price is stipulated in the Contract, it shall be used in determining the cost to Owner for such Change Order. In case of dispute between Owner and Contractor as to cost of changes, Contractor shall make all materials available for examination by Owner, pursuant to Owner’s right to audit in Section 20 of these Standard General Conditions, so as to establish the unit price basis and percentage of profit and overhead originally included in the Contract. Contractor agrees that in the event Owner and Contractor cannot agree on a price for any Change Order, Owner may engage other persons or contractors to make said change in the Work, and Contractor agrees to cooperate fully with said persons or new contractor. No decrease in the amount of the Work caused by any Change Order shall entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other compensation. 14. OWNER’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If it should appear, at any time prior to final acceptance of the Work, that Contractor: (i) has failed or refused to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence at a rate that assures completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before the completion date, or (ii) has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor’s rights under this Contract, either in whole or in part, or (iii) has falsely made Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 6 of 13 any representation or warranty in this Contract, or (iv) has otherwise failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement of this Contract, or (v) has failed to pay its debts as they come due, or (vi) has been adjudged a bankrupt, or (vii) has become insolvent and a receiver has been appointed on account thereof (“Event of Default”), and has failed to cure any such Event of Default within five business days after Contractor’s receipt of written notice of such Event of Default, then Owner shall have the right, at its election and without prejudice to any other remedies provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the following remedies: (a) Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by Owner, to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete; to remove from the Work Site any such Work; to accelerate all or any part of the Work; and to take any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance with this Contract. (b) Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment of the results stated in Subsection (a) above and withhold or recover from Contractor all the cost and expense, including attorneys’ fees and administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith. (c) Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or dilatory Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the contract price. (d) Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for further payment of amounts due or to become due under this Contract. (e) Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor’s rights under this Contract and, for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict Contractor and take possession of all equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and other papers relating to the Work, whether at the Work Site or elsewhere, and either complete or correct the Work with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor’s expense. (f) Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor’s rights under this Contract, and at Owner’s option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier contracts of Contractor shall be deemed to be assigned to Owner without any further action being required, but Owner shall not thereby assume any obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work provided or performed prior to such assignment. (g) Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not previously approved, or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses, incurred by Owner as the result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to any Event of Default. 9. Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner. 15. ASSIGNMENTS AND SUBCONTRACTS. Neither this Contract nor any interests therein shall be assigned or transferred by Contractor, nor shall any part of the Work be subcontracted, without Owner’s written consent; provided, however, that where the applicable Laws include Section 9-318 of the Uniform Commercial Code, Owner’s prior written approval shall not be required for assignments of accounts. Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or obligations under this Contract, without the consent of Contractor. If written consent for subcontracting is granted by Owner, Contractor agrees that it is responsible for ensuring that all Subcontractors maintain those insurance coverages specified in Section 11 (or as amended in writing by Owner). Contractor hereby agrees that it will indemnify, hold harmless and defend Owner pursuant to Section 11 of these Standard General Conditions should any such Subcontractors fail to maintain the required insurance coverages. 16. SIMULTANEOUS WORK BY OTHERS. Owner shall have the right to perform or have performed such other work as Owner may desire in, about, or near the Work Site during the performance of the Work by Contractor. Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such manner as to enable both the Work and such other work to be completed without hindrance or interference from each other. Contractor shall afford Owner and other contractors reasonable opportunity for the execution of Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 7 of 13 such other work and shall properly coordinate the Work with such other work. If any part of the Contractor’s Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the Work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to Owner any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Contractor’s failure so to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor’s work as fit and proper for the reception and implementation of the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor’s work after the execution of the Work. 17. LIENS. A. Waivers of Lien. Contractor shall, from time to time at Owner’s request and in any event prior to any partial payment and final payment, furnish to Owner such receipts, releases, affidavits, certificates, and other evidence as may be necessary to establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no lien against the Work or the Work Site held by Owner exists in favor of any Subcontractors or any person whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract (“Lien”) and that no right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever. B. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor shall, promptly and without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until such discharge, removal, or disposition, Owner shall have the right to retain from any money payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, deems necessary to satisfy such Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses, of any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof. Contractor may, if any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a waiver of right of lien in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to Owner, to indemnify against any potential lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments under this Contract are made, Contractor shall pay to Owner upon demands all money that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses. 18. PAYMENTS. A. Contract Price. Owner shall pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Section 18 and the Contract Documents, and Contractor shall accept in full satisfaction for providing, performing, and completing the Work, the amount or amounts set forth in the Contract Agreement (the “Contract Price”), subject to any additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this Contract, including any adjustments pursuant to Section 13 of these Standard General Conditions. B. Progress Payments. (i) Installments. The Contract Price shall be paid in monthly installments as provided in this Section 18. Owner shall pay to Contractor 90 percent of the Value of Work, determined in the manner set forth below, installed and complete in place up to the day before the Pay Request, less the aggregate of all previous Progress Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to final acceptance by Owner shall not exceed 90 percent of the Contract Price. (ii) Value of Work. The Value of the Work shall be determined as follows: (a) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis, Contractor shall, not later than ten (10) days after execution of the Contract and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a schedule showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and with substantiating data acceptable to Owner (“Breakdown Schedule”). The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule shall equal the amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum Work. An unbalanced Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. No payment shall be made for any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 8 of 13 Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised based on develop- ments occurring during the provision and performance of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule that is acceptable to Owner, Owner shall have the right either to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum Work or to make such Payments based on Owner’s determination of the value of the Work completed. (b) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value of such Work shall be determined by Owner on the basis of the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule of Prices. The actual number of acceptable units installed and complete in place shall be measured on the basis described in the Specifications or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price Items stated in the Contract are Owner’s estimate only and shall not be used in establishing the Progress or Final Payments due Contractor. The Contract Price shall be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place upon final acceptance. (iii) Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to Contractor shall be applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid and shall not be applied to or used for any pre-existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor and any third party. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 9 of 13 C. Pay Requests. Contractor shall, as a condition precedent to its right to receive each Progress Payment, submit to Owner a pay request in triplicate in the form provided by Owner (“Pay Request”). The first Pay Request shall be submitted not sooner than 30 days following commencement of the Work. Owner may, by written notice to Contractor, designate a specific day of each month on or before which Pay Requests must be submitted. Each Pay Request shall include (i) Contractor’s certification of the value of, and partial or final waivers of lien from Contractor and all Subcontractors covering, all Work for which payment is then requested and (ii) Contractor’s certification that all prior Progress Payments have been properly applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid. D. Work Entire. This Contract and the Work are entire and the Work as a whole is of the essence of this Contract. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every part of this Contract and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to Owner’s obligation to pay all or any part of the Contract Price or any other consideration for the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this Article are provided merely for the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose. E. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all respects for acceptance by Owner, Contractor shall notify Owner and request a final inspection (“Notice of Completion”). Contractor’s Notice of Completion shall be given sufficiently in advance of the Completion Date to allow for scheduling of the final inspection and for completion or correction before the Completion Date of any items identified by such inspection as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract (“Punch List Work”). F. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work shall be finally accepted when, and only when, the whole and all parts thereof shall have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full compliance with, and as required by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor’s Notice of Completion, Owner shall make a review of the Work and notify Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following Contractor’s completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner shall make another review of the Work and prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or corrected or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work (“Final Acceptance”). G. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor shall submit to Owner a properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner (“Final Pay Request”). Owner shall pay to Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting therefrom all charges against Contractor as provided for in this Contract (“Final Payment”). Final Payment shall be made not later than thirty (30) days after Owner approves the Final Pay Request. The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment shall operate as a full and complete release of Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the Work. 19. OCCUPANCY. Owner shall have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service, including without limitation installing Owner’s equipment, fixtures and merchandise and operating Owner’s business, any part of the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service shall be conducted in such manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of the Work. No such occupancy, use, or placement in service shall be construed as an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or satisfaction of Contractor’s duty to insure and protect the Work, nor shall it, unless conducted in an unreasonable manner, be considered as an interference with Contractor’s provision, performance, or completion of the Work. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 10 of 13 20. RIGHT TO AUDIT. Whenever all or any part of the Work to be performed or any Change Orders thereto under this Contract is to be paid for on a cost or a cost plus basis, all of Contractor’s correspondence, books, records, vouchers, documents and data, certified payroll records when requested by Owner, relating in any way to the Work performed or money expended under this Contract shall be open to and made reasonably available for, Owner’s inspection and audit. Owner shall have access, at all reasonable times, to all of Contractor’s records of every kind and nature relating to the Work performed. In the event Owner elects to exercise its rights pursuant to this Section, notice of such audit of Contractor’s records shall be provided within six (6) months after the final billing for this Contract is presented to Owner. 21. EEO COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. A. Affirmative Action Compliance Programs: Contractor, within 120 days from the commencement of any subcontract in the amount of $50,000 or more, and if it is not otherwise exempt under 41 CFR Part 60-1, will develop for each of its establishments a written affirmative action compliance program as called for in 41 CFR Section 60-1.40. Contractor will also require the same of its lower-tier subcontractors who have 50 or more employees and receive a subcontract of $50,000 or more and who are not otherwise exempt under 41 CFR Section 60-1.40. B. Standard Form 100 (EEO-1): If Contractor has 50 or more employees and the value of the contract or purchase order exceeds $50,000, Contractor agrees to annually file or within 30 days of acceptance of the contract or purchase order, if not presently filed, complete and accurate reports on Standard Form 100 (EEO-1). C. Equal Opportunity Clause: During the performance of the contract or purchase order, Contractor agrees as follows: (i) Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: recruitment or recruitment advertising; employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, applicable company, federal and state notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (ii) Contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by or on its behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (iii) Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union of workers’ representative of its commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, (as currently amended), and shall post copies of notices in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (iv) Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 (as currently amended), and by the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (v) Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 (as currently amended), and by the rules, regulations, and order of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (vi) In the event of Contractor’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended, in whole or in part and Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 11 of 13 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (vii) Contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of the Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance; provided, however, that in the event Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of said direction, it may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. D. Employment of Disabled Persons: Contractor complies with the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 U.S.C. §706) and to the Affirmative Action regulations regarding persons with disabilities as set forth in 41 CFR 60-741. Contractor does not discriminate against any applicant for employment or employee because of physical or mental disability and takes affirmative action to employ, advance in employment and otherwise treat qualified persons with regard to their physical or mental disability. Contractor includes the Disability Affirmative Action Clause in all non-exempt contracts or purchase orders of $2,500 or more. E. Employment of Veterans: Contractor complies with the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Act of 1974 (38 USC §4211 et. seq.) and the affirmative action obligations of contractors that are further set forth in 41 CFR §60-250 et. seq. (38 USC §4211, and 38 USC §2024) F. Subcontracting with Small Businesses and Small Disadvantaged Business Concerns: It is the policy of Owner to place a fair proportion of its acquisitions, including contracts and subcontracts for sub- systems, assemblies, components, and related services for major systems, with small business concerns and small disadvantaged business concerns. A small business concern means a concern, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding on contracts, and qualified as a small business concern under the criteria and size standards in 13 CFR Part 121. Small disadvantaged business concern means a small business concern that is at least 51% owned by one or more individuals who are both socially and economically disadvantaged, or a publicly owned business having at least 51% of its stock owned by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals and has its management and daily business controlled by one or more such individuals. (a) Socially disadvantaged individuals means individuals who have been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because of their identity as a member of a group without regard to their qualities as individuals. (b) Economically disadvantaged individuals means socially disadvantaged individuals whose ability to compete in the free enterprise system is impaired due to diminished opportunities to obtain capital and credit as compared to others in the same line of business who are not socially disadvantaged. Individuals who certify that they are members of named groups (Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Native Americans, Asian-Pacific Americans, Subcontinent-Asian Americans) are to be considered socially and economically disadvantaged. In addition, consideration under this regulation is extended to women-owned small businesses. Women owned, as used in this provision, means a small business that is at least 51% owned by a woman or women who are U.S. citizens and who also control and operate the business. If a subcontractor or portion of a contract or order which exceeds $10,000 becomes involved, Contractor agrees that small business concerns and small disadvantaged business concerns shall have the maximum practicable opportunity to participate in contract performance consistent with its efficient performance. If a subcontract arises within a contract or order which exceeds $500,000 and is to be performed entirely within the United States or its possessions, and is not for personal services, Contractor will comply with the regulations pertaining to such contract as indicated at 48 CFR Chapter 1, §19.702. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 12 of 13 22. GENERAL PROVISIONS. A. Definitions. Whenever the following capitalized terms are used in the Contract Documents, they shall have the following meanings: Claims shall mean all lawsuits, claims, damages, demands, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses of Owner. Completion Date shall mean the date upon which all Work must be complete in place, as established in the Contract Agreement. Contract Time shall mean the time between the commencement date and the completion date as stated in the Contract Documents. Laws shall mean all laws, statutes, ordinances, regulations, orders, decrees and other legal requirements, whether federal, state or local existing on or after the date of execution of this Contract. Subcontractor shall mean any person, other than Contractor, that (i) provides, performs, completes any part of the Work at the Work Site, and the duly authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives of any such person, or (ii) supplies equipment, materials or supplies for the Work, including that fabricated to a special design, but that does not provide or perform labor at the Work Site, and the duly authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives of any such Person. B. Binding Effect. This Contract shall be binding upon Owner and Contractor and upon their respective heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in this Contract to a party shall also be deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents, and representatives of such party. C. Relationship of the Parties. Contractor shall act as an independent contractor in providing and performing the Work. Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract shall be construed (i) to create the relationship of principal and agent, partners, or joint ventures between Owner and Contractor or (ii) to create any relationship between Owner and any Subcontractor of Contractor. D. No Waiver. No examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination, decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, nor any order by Owner for the payment of money, nor any payment for, or use, occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the Work by Owner, nor any extension of time granted by Owner, nor any delay by Owner in exercising any right under this Contract, nor any other act or omission of Owner shall constitute or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor; or of any requirement or provision of this Contract; or of any remedy, power, or right of Owner. E. No Third Party Beneficiaries. No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, firm, or corporation other than Contractor shall be made or be valid against Owner. F. Severability. The provisions of this Contract shall be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of the remaining part of such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract shall be in any way affected thereby. G. Notices. Any notices or other communication required or permitted to be given under this Contract shall be in writing and shall be (a) personally delivered, or (b) delivered by a reputable overnight courier, or (c) delivered by certified mail, returned receipt requested, and deposited in the U.S. Mail, postage prepaid. Telecopy notices shall be deemed valid only to the extent they are (i) actually Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 01001 - Page 13 of 13 received by the individual to whom addressed and (ii) followed by delivery of actual notice in the manner described in either (a), (b) or (c) above within three (3) business days thereafter. Notices shall be deemed received at the earlier (x) of actual receipt; or (y) one (1) business day after deposit with an overnight courier as evidenced by a receipt of deposit; or (z) three (3) business days following deposit in the U.S. mail, as evidenced by a return receipt. Notices shall be directed to the parties at their respective addresses set forth in the Contract Agreement or at such other address as either party may, from time to time, specify by written notice to the other in the manner described above. H. Choice of Law. This Contract shall be construed in accordance with the internal laws, but not the conflicts of laws rules, of the state in which the Work is located. I. Year 2000 Compliance. Contractor warrants and represents that all versions of each service and product and associated hardware, software, firmware, system, equipment and device delivered under this Contract (individually and collectively the Product) is fully capable of complying with the Year 2000 Requirements. Year 2000 Requirements means the ability of the product to provide the following functions: (a) consistently and accurately handle and process date information before, during and after January 1, 2000, including but not limited to accepting date input, providing date output, and performing calculations on dates or portions of dates; (b) function accurately without interruption (or disruption of other software, hardware or systems) before, during and after January 1, 2000, without any change in operations; (c) respond to two-digit date input in a way that resolves any ambiguity as to century; and (d) store and provide output of date information in ways that are unambiguous as to century. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 1 of 7 SECTION 01002 GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL 1. Contractor and all Subcontractors are directed and required to read the entire project manual and Standard General Conditions included herein in order to familiarize themselves with all items related to their individual crafts. 2. The BFS Retail & Commercial Operations, LLC, Standard General Conditions as part of the Contract Form are a part of these specifications and the contractors will be held responsible for their fulfillment. Non-reading of said Standard General Conditions by Contractor or subcontractors shall not be accepted as an excuse for failure to comply with them. 3. Contractor shall keep one complete up-to-date set of Drawings and Specifications on the job at all times, including all voided sheets for ready reference in addition to other copies of Drawings and Specifications used by mechanics on actual construction work. B. DEFINITIONS Wherever the words "Owner and Contractor” are used in this Project Manual, it refers to those entities as defined on the Contract Form. C. TERMS INCLUDED Any item or construction detail not shown on the Drawings but called for in the Specifications and any item or construction detail shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications are a part of this contract just as much as if they are shown and mentioned on both Drawings and Specifications. D. CHANGES Any changes or additions to the Contract, Drawings or Specifications shall be in writing on Owner's "Change Order" form. Contractor and all subcontractors are hereby given notice that no extras will be recognized unless they are authorized in writing on said form by Owner's Field Representative. E. DISCREPANCIES, CONTRADICTIONS AND AMBIGUITIES 1. Any discrepancies, contradictions or ambiguities on the Drawings and/or specifications or between the Drawings and specifications shall be called to the Owner's attention at time of submitting bid and before awarding of contract. If this procedure is not followed, the Owner reserves the right to rule on any discrepancies, contradictions or ambiguities in the Drawings and Specifications after awarding of contract and Owner's decision shall be final. Contractor shall have no claim for extra compensation because of decision. 2. No extra charge will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on Drawings. Differences which may be found shall be submitted to Owner for his consideration before proceeding with the work.. F. CODES Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 2 of 7 1. Contractor shall submit his base bid in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. If Drawings and Specifications do not comply with any codes or utility company requirements having jurisdiction, then Contractor shall submit an alternate price on any changes necessary to comply with such codes. If such alternates are not stated in bid, it shall be assumed that Contractor's base bid includes all work necessary to comply with such codes or utility company regulations. No extras shall be paid for any work required for complying with such codes or for replacing work and materials in order to meet requirements of codes or utility company regulations having jurisdiction. 2. If Drawings and Specifications call for an installation with requirements in excess of the minimum code requirements, the installation shall be made strictly in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. G. INSPECTION OF WORK Contractor shall provide and keep on job a safety helmet for use of authorized representatives. In the event the specifications, laws, ordinances, or any public authority requires any part of work or materials to be specially tested or installation specially supervised, such testing and supervision shall be at Contractor's expense. Owner shall be notified in writing of time, date and place fixed for such testing and supervision. H. CONTRACTOR 1. Attention is called to the Contractor that he shall provide a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants (all satisfactory to owner) in order to provide strict supervision over all Subcontractors. He shall familiarize himself with those portions of the Specifications and Drawings pertaining to the Subcontractors. The Contractor shall see that each of the Subcontractors under this Contract fully and faithfully completes all work in strict accordance with the provisions as set forth in the Drawings and Specifications as they pertain to those Subcontractors. General Contractor shall be held responsible for the failure of any of his Subcontractors to complete all the work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Should the contractor object to methods or materials specified, he shall notify Owner in writing and have same adjusted before proceeding with the work. Procedure without notice shall be construed as full acceptance of the Drawings and Specifications. I. SUBCONTRACTS 1. General Contractor shall be held responsible for all material or labor furnished by subcontractors. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any subcontractors and contractor shall obtain Owner's approval before letting any subcontracts or placing orders for materials. 2. Subcontractor certification shall be required for hoist and Firestone Rubber guard” roof installations. J. COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS Contractor shall collaborate with any subcontractor for building of recess, openings, etc. or leaving holes as required by other contractors. If proper notice and instructions are not given to Contractor prior to the erection of such work, subcontractor shall then employ Contractor to do the work required for them at Subcontractor's expense. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 3 of 7 K. ACCEPTANCE OF OTHER CONTRACTOR'S WORK If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to Owner any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other Contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work, except as to defects which may develop in the other contractor's work after the execution of his work.. L. MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Wherever any particular brand of material is specified, either on Drawings or Specifications, the same is to be regarded as a standard. If any other article of equal merit is proposed by Contractor, he must obtain owner's prior approval in writing. Where specifications list several Manufacturers of like materials, only those manufacturers' products are acceptable. If Contractor desires to use any other, written approval shall be obtained from Owner before accepting quotations or Purchasing materials manufactured by firms not specified. If Contractor purchases materials manufactured or fabricated by firms that are not listed in specifications, they do so at their own risk. No item other than specified will be considered if brought to site without previous written permission. All materials of special make where called for shall be furnished with all accessories necessary for proper installation as per manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. M. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 1. Unless otherwise specifically provided by contract, change order or herein, all materials shall be new. Both workmanship and materials shall be of the best quality for their respective trades. Each contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work under contract to him. 2. In addition each Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the work or required in order that various portions of building are completed in accordance with good construction and engineering practice. These are to be provided even though such items may not be specifically described or indicated, but are necessary to complete property the installation of the work. Each Contractor shall submit, without extra charge, evidence (satisfactory to Owner) that each item of material furnished under his contract fulfills the requirements of the specifications for such materials. 3. Should at any time improper, imperfect, or unsound material or faulty workmanship be observed, whether before or after the same shall have been brought into the structure, the Contractor shall, upon notice from the Owner, cause the same to be removed and good and proper material or work substituted therefore without delay. In the event the contractor defaults in promptly handling the foregoing and after receipt of written notice by Owner of such default, Owner may resort to such other means as may be deemed necessary to correct such imperfections as described above. The cost of correcting these imperfections or such alterations shall be charged to the contractor and the amount therefore deducted from the sum due to or recoverable from him under this contract. 4. If Owner deems it inexpedient to correct work injured or work done not in accordance with Drawings, Specifications and contract, an equitable deduction from the contract price or refund to Owner shall be made therefore. 5. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and good condition of all work and materials in his contract until the completion of his contract as an entirety. In addition, contractor shall be responsible for fulfilling his obligation of providing all materials and executing all work in strict accordance with drawings and specifications for a period of one year from date of completion of project. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 4 of 7 N. PAYMENT AND LIEN WAIVER Beginning with the first application for payment, the Contractor shall submit a notarized Waiver of Right of Lien for material and labor (which is in place and paid for) from all Sub-Contractors and suppliers included in the applicable payment. O. MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER Contractor shall refer to Section 01003 of these Specifications for materials to be furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor. Those materials will be supplied by Owner, F.O.B. job site and shall be stored by Contractor (see paragraph immediately below) and installed by Contractor or respective subcontractor. In the absence of any notes or statements on Drawings, or in specifications, to the effect that various materials to complete job are to be furnished by Owner, they shall be furnished by Contractor. P. RECEIVING AND CARING FOR MATERIAL FURNISHED BY OWNER 1. General Contractor shall be held responsible for receiving and safeguarding of all material furnished by Owner. General Contractor shall receive all items from the shipper,, unload, check and sign the bill of lading as to number of items received, description, weight and for visible or concealed damage. He shall examine this material when it is received. If any damage is found or if any items are missing from shipment that are called for on carriers delivery ticket all shall be immediately called to the attention of carriers agent. Notations of such damage or shortages shall be made on the delivery ticket or bill of lading, or in any other manner in accordance with the requirements of that particular carrier. General Contractor shall obtain the signature of carrier's agent to this notation of damage or shortage. Such papers and notations shall then be delivered to Owner immediately to enable Owner to file necessary claim. In the event such damages or shortages are not noted then it shall be contractors obligations to furnish new items of equal quality to complete the project. 2. General Contractor to advise and confirm exact street address and postal zip code for deliveries. Q. STORAGE SHED Contractor shall provide shed for safe storage of such material as may be damaged by weather including materials furnished by Owner. Contractor shall keep shed in good repair and when it is no longer needed remove from site. R. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES 1. Manufacturer's warranties on installed equipment and other building items, as well as subcontractor and supplier warranties and guarantees, express or implied, respecting any part of the work and any materials used therein shall be deemed obtained and shall be enforced--by the contractor as the agent for the benefit of the owner. 2. Contractor shall furnish copies of the warranties of the equipment or building items where such warranties have been issued by manufacturer. S. CONTROLLED MATERIALS Where materials are required by the Governing Building Codes to be certified by an accredited authoritative agency as meeting accepted engineering standards for quality, the certification shall be Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 5 of 7 furnished by the Contractor. T. SCHEDULES & ESTIMATES Immediately after execution and delivery of the contract, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a "Building Progress Schedule" showing the proposed dates of commencement and completion of each of the various sub-divisions of work required under this project. Contractor shall keep schedule updated at least bi-weekly. Within twenty (20) days after execution of Contract, Contractor shall name all subcontractors and material dealers from whom materials will be purchased for this project. In the case that work is not completed within the allotted time frame the Contractor will be responsible for Liquidated Damages in the amount of $2,500 per day. He shall submit a breakdown (Schedule of Values) of the contract price, by trade, to the Owner on the Schedule of Value form. This "Schedule of Values" when approved by Owner shall be the basis of computing monthly estimates of work completed on the project. U. SHOP DRAWINGS Contractor shall submit with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor, three copies of all shop or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades. Owner shall waive the requirement of all shop drawing submittals when contractor intends to supply materials exactly matching the drawings and specifications with the exception of: pre-engineered building reaction loads and anchor bolt layouts; reinforcing steel; HVAC equipment. Contractor must submit shop drawings for all proposed "equal substitution products. Owner shall pass upon submitted drawings with reasonable promptness making desired corrections, including all necessary corrections relating to artistic effect. Contractor shall make all corrections required by Owner, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. Owner's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he had in writing called Owner's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedule. V. PERMITS AND FEES 1. Before any work is started or materials purchased or purchase commitments made, Contractor shall first take out and pay for all permits, licenses and fees as specifically detailed and required under the Building or Zoning Ordinances of The Municipality or the legal authority having jurisdiction. Copies of all such permits, etc. shall be submitted to Owner with first Application for Payment. 2. In the event the necessary permits referred to herein cannot be obtained by Contractor, the Owner may, without prejudice, terminate the employment of Contractor and declare contract of no further force and effect. Such action shall relieve Owner and Contractor of all obligations under contract. W. MODEL ENERGY EFFICIENCY CODE REQUIREMENTS When required, Contractor shall obtain and submit the fully executed Energy Efficiency-Forms and Calculations to the governing authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall furnish owner with a copy of the executed form and calculations. All fees pertaining to the above shall be paid by the Contractor. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 6 of 7 X. TEMPORARY LIGHT, HEAT, POWER, WATER AND TELEPHONE 1. Contractor shall provide all temporary light and power necessary to the operation under this contract, including connections needed to supply same. He shall also provide water and toilet facilities for his men and all other operations in connection with the building and remove all temporary lines and connections at completion of the work. 2. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and provide heat if it is necessary to protect the construction, provide for safety of materials and personnel, and make possible the expeditious handling of the performance of this contract. Owner shall approve method of heating used which shall comply with OSHA requirements, local and national codes. 3. Contractor shall provide a temporary construction telephone at the job site when one is not already there. Y. SHORING AND BRACING 1. Contractor shall provide all permanent and temporary bracing, shoring, and anchoring that the nature of his work may require in order to make everything absolutely stable and secure even where such bracing, shoring, and anchoring are not explicitly called for. Contractor will be held strictly accountable for any damage or injury resulting from judgment or for any other cause. 2. Contractor shall do all underpinning or shoring that may be necessary to properly execute the work or for protection of adjoining property under local code or law. Z. PROTECTION AGAINST INJURY OR DAMAGE 1. Contractor shall protect from damage the work finished and furnished by him or others. He shall protect if from loss resulting from carelessness, the elements or any other causes, except for damage by perils covered by the usual fire and extended coverage risk assumed by the Owner. He shall protect the entire work until it is completed and accepted by Owner. Owner will not carry individual policies at different sites as owner is self-insured and will assume the following risk: In case the building or building materials shall be destroyed, in whole or in part, by any of the perils covered under the fire and extended coverage insurance on the usual standard form of insurance policy in use in the state within which the site is situated, Owner shall cover damages. Normal perils that are covered include fire, Acts of God, vandalism, and malicious mischief. Theft and collapse are not covered. 2. Contractor shall replace any part of the work which is damaged as described above prior to the time the entire work is completed and accepted by Owner. Contractor shall also protect and hold Owner harmless from any damage to adjacent property arising out of the performance of this Contract. AA. FINAL CLEAN-UP AND REMOVALS 1. Contractor is responsible for cleanliness of the service area floor. He shall use diligence to prevent oil spills, marking of floor by equipment or materials or any other discoloration or roughness. All spills/marks shall be cleaned up immediately. 2. At the completion of work, Contractor shall remove all his rubbish from and about the building or premises, all his tools scaffolding and surplus materials. He shall leave his work "Broom-Clean" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 7 of 7 3. Upon completion of the job, all plaster, paint stains, labels, etc. shall be removed from glass by Contractor, and glass washed and the entire building be left in a clean and sightly condition. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 01003 - Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01003 SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS A. OTHER CONTRACTS It is Owner's intention that other contracts will be let in connection with this building project such as the installation of signs, various shop equipment, etc. The Contractor and all of the Subcontractors shall cooperate with the parties installing special items in order that work can be properly coordinated and completed as expeditiously as possible. B. MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER All items that are furnished by the Owner or Tenant for installation by the Contractor, see itemized listing below, will be shipped F.O.B. job site, (street address, city, state, zip). These materials shall be received, unloaded, stored and installed by the Contractor. Contractor shall receive all items from the shipper, unload, check and sign the bill of lading as to number of items received, description, weight and for visible or concealed damages. Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the Owner furnished items until the construction project is complete. In the absence of any notes or statement on the Drawings to the effect that various materials are to be furnished by the Owner, then all materials to complete the job are to be furnished by the Contractor. The Owner expects to furnish when needed, the items listed below, so that Contractor's work schedule may be maintained as contemplated. However, they shall not be responsible for any delays or inability to supply or deliver any materials contemplated to be supplied by them hereunder, provided such delays are occasioned to be fire, the elements, emergency, interruption of transportation facilities, inability to obtain of Bridgestone/Firestone or their source of supply. Contractor shall submit a schedule showing dates materials are to be delivered to job site. As previously stated, Owner will pay all delivery charges necessary to ship all Owner furnished items to the new store site (or to Contractor's yard or other alternate delivery site as requested by Contractor). Any freight charges for demurrage, re-delivery, double handling, temporary storage, etc. that are incurred by Owner for shipments that are refused by the contractor, shall be the Contractor's responsibility and shall be deducted from the final payment. These potential extra freight charges shall be charged to the Contractor only if the deliveries are made to the proper location and on or after the date requested by the contractor. Owner shall be responsible for extra charges if deliveries are made early and subsequently refused. Please be aware that it is very difficult to revise the shipping schedule for items once they have been released. C. SIGNS 1. 4'-0" temporary identification sign announcing a new "Firestone Complete Auto Care " store, furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor. 3. Building mounted signage, as shown on drawings, furnished and installed by Owner. Contractor to furnish electrical power to a junction box at the signs shown; final hookup from junction box at the sign by Contractor. 4. Free standing signs-“Firestone Complete Auto Care” a. By Sign Subcontractor – foundation and sign (including poles). b. By Contractor – electrical power to a junction box at the sign. c. By Contractor – final hookup of electric to the sign. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 01003 - Page 2 of 2 d. Masonry Veneer – by Contractor on Sign Subcontractor’s base. D. EQUIPMENT Contractor shall install all equipment / fixtures as listed on sheets F1 and F2 in full accordance with the manufacturers latest recommendations so that it is operational and functions as intended. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - Page 1 of 2 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-construction meeting. B. Progress meetings. C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner's Representative will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Owner's Representative. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. C. The Contractor shall record the minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, to Owner's Representative, and to those affected by decisions made. 2.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at appropriate intervals. B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, and the Owner's Representative; as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 11. Other business relating to Work. D. The Contractor shall record the minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, to Owner's Representative, and to those affected by decisions made. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - Page 2 of 2 operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 2.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW and/or APPROVAL A. Shop Drawings and Information will be required as listed below: 1 Structural Steel and Joists (Wood structures if applicable) 2 Anchor Bolt Details 3 Reinforcing Steel 4 Mechanical Equipment 5 Interior and Exterior Luminaries 6 Electrical Switch-gear and Panel-boards 7 Fire Alarm 8 Sprinkler (If applicable) 9 Plumbing Fixtures 10 Concrete and Mortar Mix Designs PART 3 SUBMITTALS 3.01 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small size sheets, not larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Owner's Representative. 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 3.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Deliver submittals to and as designated by the Owner's Representative. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Owner's Representative review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 1 of 4 SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Control of installation. D. Testing and inspection services. 1.02 STANDARDS and REFERENCES A. Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. B. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. C. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source at his own expense. D. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in the Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated name. Master Listing of Specification Standard and Reference Sources. AABC MN Associated Air Balance Council ABMA STD American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. ACI American Concrete Institute International AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. ANSI American National Specification Institute ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Standard Testing Methods AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute GA Gypsum Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IIAR International Institute of Ammonia Refrigeration IMIAWC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA International Electrical Testing Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 2 of 4 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. E. For products and workmanship specified, comply with requirements of the applicable reference and standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. F. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. G. Should specified reference standards have conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Owner's Representative before proceeding. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit (2) two copies of report to Owner's Representative and (1) one copy to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Owner's Representative, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test reports are submitted for the Owner's Representative's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information, for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 1.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Contractor will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform testing. B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM C802. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D290. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 2.02 TOLERANCES Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 3 of 4 A. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding. 2.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Promptly notify Owner's Representative and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or products. 3. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner's Representative. 4. Attend pre-construction meetings and progress meetings. 5. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency. 2.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Owner's Representative will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. PART 3 REQUIRED TESTS 3.01 SITE AND BUILDING EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. A Soils Engineer and Soils Laboratory as required, qualified in soil testing and evaluation shall observe the site grading, placement of fill and the excavation and backfill of the building, site drainage system, and site utilities. B. The Soils Laboratory shall analyze all native or imported fill and backfill material and topsoil proposed for use to determine the suitability for use and compliance with the Contract Documents. 1 Fill and backfill material shall be examined as to soil classification and tested to determine the Plasticity Index, optimum moisture content and dry density. 2 After rough grading and prior to spreading of topsoil, the topsoil in the planting areas shall be examined for organic content, acidity and soil composition. C. All natural grades to be retained, all areas of cut and all areas of controlled fill or backfill shall be field tested by the Soils Engineer for moisture content and percent of compaction for compliance with the specified values. 1 The number of tests performed shall be at the discretion of the Soils Engineer, except that the number of field tests performed shall not be less than the minimum described below. a. Within the building area perform one (1) test for every 100 cubic yards of fill and backfill or in areas of natural grade or cut, one (1) test for every 1000 square feet, except that such tests must be located as to give equal coverage to all portions of the building sub-grade. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 4 of 4 b. Within the paved areas of the site, except trench excavations, one (1) test for every 500 cubic yards of fill or in area of natural grade or cut one (1) test for every 2000 square feet. c. Within trench excavations provide one (1) test for every 200 cubic yards or 50 linear feet of fill or backfill. D. Building foundation excavation and subgrade preparation shall be observed by the soils engineer. The soils engineer shall confirm the size, depth and suitability of the excavated areas and test and verify the soil bearing capacity for compliance with the specified values. Porous fill shall be examined for soils classification, depth and percent of compaction. 1. Test and verify soil-bearing capacity of each column footing and every 30 lineal feet of wall foundation. Test results must indicate in-place soil bearing capacity. 3.02 PAVING A. Aggregate base course shall be tested for compliance with specified physical requirements and sieve analysis. Installation shall be observed for compacted thickness, cross section and grade. Field density tests shall be conducted to determine optimum moisture content and percent of compaction. B. Asphalt concrete mix shall be tested for asphalt cement content, gradation, Marshall stability, air voids, and physical requirements. Engineer shall observe asphalt concrete placement for procedures employed and compliance with indicated cross section and grade. Field density and extraction tests shall be conducted to determine percent of compaction. C. The testing laboratory and engineer shall certify in writing that the aggregate base and asphalt concrete have been installed in conformance with the contract documents. D. Portland cement concrete pavement shall be tested and inspected in accordance with section 3.03 Concrete. E. Obtain a minimum of four (4) cores from the completed pavement section including the aggregate base course for laboratory verification of the completed pavement construction. The location of the cores shall be selected by the owners’ repr3sentative. 3.03 CONCRETE The testing laboratory shall test all building concrete and Portland cement concrete paving for compliance with the contract documents. The laboratory shall perform the following: 1. Check batching and mixing operations periodically. 2. Review the manufacturers’ certificate or mill test for each shipment of cement and reinforcing steel and/or conduct laboratory tests or spot checks of these materials as they are received. 3. Mold and test concrete cylinders as required. 4. Samples shall be taken from each mix design placed in any one (1) day or from 25 cu.yds. of concrete placed in continuous pours, whichever is the lesser. 5. Cast three cylinder specimens from each sample. Cure two cylinders in the laboratory and one in the field. The field cylinder shall be tested for 7-day strength and the two laboratory-cured cylinders shall be tested for 28-day strength. 6. Determine the slump and air-entrainment for each sample taken. 7. Test reports shall include the temperature of the air and concrete at the site at time of delivery and placement, slump, air content, mix proportions and any other data necessary to determine compliance with the contract documents. 8. Should any tests at any time indicate that concrete being used does not comply with the contract documents or should there be a likelihood of the concrete having been frozen, the contractor, if so directed by the owner shall, at his own expense, make loading tests. If the unit area under consideration fails to pass the loading test or shows signs of failure; it shall be removed and rebuilt by the contractor, at his expense, or such additional construction as the owner considers necessary to make the structure sound, shall be provided at the contractor expense. 9. Inspect installed reinforcement for conformance with the Contract Documents before concrete placement. 3.04 HIGH STRENGTH BOLT AND WELDED STEEL CONNECTION TESTING Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 5 of 4 A. A qualified independent inspector shall inspect all bolted and welded steel connections in accordance and for compliance with the Contract Documents, the Specifications of the Research Council on Structural Connections, and AISC S329. B. Testing at least 10 percent of bolts at each connection. C. The inspector shall visually check all connections for use of proper bolt type and washer installation. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - Page 1 of 1 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Substitution limitations and procedures. 1.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders: specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Owner's Representative for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities. D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Owner's Representative will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents (As-Built Drawings). B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Spare Materials D. Warranties and Bonds. E. Architect’s Responsibilities (Owners Representatives Responsibility). PART 2 EXECUTION and SUBMITTALS 2.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings 2. Addenda 3. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract Documents. 4. Approved shop drawings and submittals. B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. D. Record information concurrent with construction progress. E. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Field changes of dimension and detail. 2. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3. At completion of project provide three (3) complete sets of Record Drawings to the owner’s representative - See Section 2.06. 2.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 2.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS and MATERIALS A. For Each Item of Equipment, Each System and all Materials: 1. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. 2. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. 3. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. 4. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. 5. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 6. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 - Page 1 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx required for maintenance. 7. At completion of project provide three (3) copies of complete Operation Manual to owner’s representative - See Section 2.06. 8. Operation Manuals shall include a Listing complete with trades or materials, names, addresses, telephone numbers and contact names for all Sub-Contractors and Suppliers. 2.04 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide spare parts, materials, and extra products of types and in quantities as specified below. 1. Paint - 1gallon of each type used 2. Floor Tile - 1case 3. Ceiling Tile - 1 case 4. Compressor Oil – 2 quarts 5. Spare set of RTU filters – pleated type 6. 2 complete sets of electrical panel keys 7. spare lamps (exterior and interior) 2 each type B. Deliver to project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 2.05 WARRANTIES A. Obtain warranties, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Submit warranties and bonds at time of substantial completion of work – See Section 2.06. E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers. F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal. G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Project Manual. H. Include warranties as listed below. Shingle Roofing 20 years Joint Sealers 5 years H.M. Doors and Frames 1 year Overhead Doors & Operators 5 Years Metal-Framed Storefront 1 year Door Hardware 5 years Glazing 1 year Acoustical Ceilings 1 year Resilient Flooring 1 year Painting 1 year Toilet Partitions 1 year Electric Water Cooler 5 years Water Heater 5 years HVAC Equipment 1 year 5 years on compressors / 10 years on heat exchanger. Electrical 1 year Concrete 1 year Asphalt Paving 2 years CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 - Page 2 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 - Page 3 of 3 Infrared Tube Heaters 1 year 5 years on combustion chamber/radiant tube. Fire Alarm System 1 year Plumbing 1 year Concrete Sealer 5 years All Labor, Equipment, and Materials not specifically listed above shall receive the standard manufacturer’s/contractors warranty or 1 year, whichever is longer. 2.06 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings and O&M Manuals. 1. One (1) CD of all drawings in PDF format. 2. One (1) CD of O&M Manual in PDF format. B. Record Drawings and O&M Manuals may be submitted on the same disc. C. Warranties do not need to be submitted electronically D. Submit all hard copies and electronic copies to: Amcon Design & Construction Co., LLC David Olson - Assistant Project Manager 20633 Watertown Ct. Suite 200 Waukesha, WI 53186 Phone: (262) 717-9944 Fax: (262) 717-9510 E-mail: davidolson@amcondc.com Web: www.amcondc.com END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 02112 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 02112 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the clearing, grubbing and stripping as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein and shall include removing and disposing of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project area. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 3.01 CLEARING A. Clear the project site of designated trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish, and objectionable material. 3.02 GRUBBING A. Grub all stumps and roots to a depth of two and one half feet below natural ground. 3.03 STRIPPING A. Stripping all area, which underlie compacted fill, of all humus, vegetation or other unsuitable materials encountered within the top 6 inches of soil. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. Remove all materials from the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operation from the site when no disposal area is shown on the drawings, Burning will be allowed when not in violation with local ordinances; however, Contractor shall be held responsible for any fires or accidents resulting from this operation. END OF SECTION 02112 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 1 of 6 SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION a. The extent of earthwork and site grading, including preparation of subgrade for pavements where shown on the drawings. The following operations are included in this section of the specifications: i. Preparation of subgrade, complete. ii. Compacted fill under and around paving. iii. Excavation and backfilling, complete, including the footings and miscellaneous items. iv. Testing and Inspection Service: The Owner shall employ and pay for a testing and inspection service. Testing service will include soil survey for satisfactory soil materials, sampling and testing soil materials proposed for use in the work, and field testing facilities for quality control testing during earthwork operations. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE a. References i. ASTM D698 - Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture using 5.5 (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 inch (305 mm) Drop. ii. ASTM D2167 - Test Methods for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. iii. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials, referred to as AASHTO. 1.03 SUBMITTALS a. Test Reports: Reports of all tests and inspections shall be forwarded to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer and Contractor. Reports of tests shall state whether or not tests conform to contract documents. 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING a. Material Storage: Stockpile excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil material where directed, until required for fill; place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 2 of 6 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS a. Fill: In accordance with drawings. 2.02 FABRICATION a. No additional requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION a. Safety Codes and Standards: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for performing the work in a safe and workmanlike manner. The Contractor shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with and complying with all safety requirements of the governing authorities having jurisdiction. b. Existing Utilities: Locate existing utilities underground by careful excavation before starting earthwork operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during construction operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and public and private utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. i. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after temporary utility services have been provided. c. Use of Explosives: Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without the prior written permission of Architect. Contractor is solely responsible for the handling, storage, and use of explosive materials when their use is permitted. d. Protection of Persons and Property: i. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights as required for the safety of persons. Protect structures, utilities sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards. ii. Take precautions and provide necessary bracing and shoring to guard against movement or settlement of existing improvements or new construction. Contractor is entirely responsible for strength and adequacy of bracing and shoring, and for safety and support of construction from damage or injury caused by lack thereof or by movement or settlement. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 3 of 6 3.02 EXCAVATION a. Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of all material encountered to obtain required elevations. Excavations shall be made to proper depth, with allowances made for clearances to install services and forms. Cuts shall be accurately shaped to cross-sections and grades indicated. i. Classification of Materials: Material to be excavated is unclassified. Contractor shall visit and determine for himself classification of the materials to be removed. NO EXTRA PAYMENT will be made for rock excavation. b. Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of the material indicated below elevations without specific direction of the Architect. Replace unauthorized excavation as herein specified. Excavations from footing carried below elevations indicated on drawings shall be filled with specified footing type concrete at Contractor's expense. Excavations carried below the grades indicated for trenches shall be backfilled with suitable soil or select fill at Contractor's expense. c. Dewatering: i. Perform earthwork and site grading in a manner to prevent surface water and sub grade or ground water from flowing into excavations, and to prevent water from flooding the project site and surrounding area. ii. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove all water from excavations using dewatering methods, which will prevent softening of foundations bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of the sub grades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering components necessary to convey water away from the site. iii. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or runoff areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions. Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as temporary drainage ditches. d. In no case shall "water settling" or jetting be employed. 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL a. General: i. Backfill consists of the placement of specified backfill material in layers, in the excavations to the required sub grade elevations. ii. Fill consists of the placement of specified fill materials, in layers, over the ground surface to the required elevations. b. Backfill and Fill Materials: Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 4 of 6 i. Provide satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill. Use excavated or borrow material that has been sampled, tested, and approved as satisfactory backfill and fill material by the testing service. c. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content of the soil material. Compact each layer to the required percentage of maximum density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 3.04 COMPACTION a. Perform the compaction of soil materials using suitable soil compaction equipment for the materials to be compacted and the work area locations. b. Control soil compaction during construction for compliance with percentage of maximum density specified for each area classification. c. Compaction Equipment: i. Provide compaction equipment of suitable size and number, and in satisfactory working condition to compete the work on schedule. ii. Use sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic tired roller, tamper rollers, vibrating tampers, pneumatic hand tampers, or other compaction equipment capable of obtaining the required density throughout the entire area being compacted. d. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: i. Buildings and Miscellaneous Structures: See Foundation Notes on drawing S-1. ii. Concrete Pavements: e. Moisture Control: i. Provide equipment capable of adding measured amounts of moisture to the soil material as determined by moisture density relation tests. Maintain the actual moisture content in the soil material at the time of compaction to within the limits specified for each area classification. ii. Where the sub grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply the required amount of water to the surface of sub grade, or layer of soil material, in such a manner as to prevent free water appearing in the surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. iii. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified percentage of maximum density. iv. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread on the surface where directed by the Architect and permitted to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until the moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as determined by moisture Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 5 of 6 density relation tests. When accepted by the Architect, the soil material may be used in compacted backfill or fill. 3.05 GRADING AND DRAINAGE a. Uniformly grade all areas within the limits of site grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth the finished surface within the specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. Where finish contour lines are not shown ground surfaces shall be finished to drain away from buildings and minor surfaces shall be finished. 3.06 MAINTENANCE a. Protection of existing site: i. Carefully maintain benchmarks, monuments, layout stakes and other reference points. ii. Protect property, including adjoining property and public right-of-ways, from damage by trucks and equipment. b. Protection of graded Areas: i. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. ii. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the specified tolerances. c. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: When completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape and compact to the required density prior to further construction. Use hand tamping for recompaction over underground utilities, if any. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS a. Transport waste material, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash, and debris to designate spoil areas on the Owner's property and dispose of as directed. b. Remove all waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash, and debris, from the Owner's property and legally dispose of it. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a. The Architect will inspect construction throughout the various work stages. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 6 of 6 b. Notify the Architect and Owner's testing agency at least 72 hours in advance, excluding Saturday and Sunday, before Earthwork. c. Testing Laboratory Services: i. Tests for Proposed Soil Materials: The testing service will determine the suitability of all materials to be used as fills. Submit one moisture-density curve for each type of soil encountered in sub grade and used as fill. Determine maximum densities in accordance with ASTM D698, current issue. ii. Testing service must inspect and approve all sub grades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon. Each sub grade and fill layer shall be tested for in-place density and moisture content in accordance with iii. ASTM D2167 at a frequency of one test per 5,000 square feet or a minimum of 2 samples, whichever is greater, to assure that the fill is properly compacted. iv. If, in Architect's opinion, based on reports of testing service and inspection the sub grade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, Architect will require additional compaction and testing at Contractor's expense. Results of density test of soil-in-place will be considered satisfactory if average of any four consecutive density tests which may be selected are in each instance equal to or greater than specified density, and if not more than one density test out of five has a value more than 2% below required density. 3.09 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall be responsible for additional work as may be required to correct work which does not conform to specified requirements, including density and tolerances. END OF SECTION 02200 SECTION 02210 SITE GRADING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish shaping and grading indicated on the drawings and specified herein and shall include maintaining surface drainage during construction, finish grading and all phases of the cleanup operation. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall uniformly grade the entire project site to provide a pleasing appearance. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SITE GRADING 02210 - Page 2 of 1 3.01 FINISHING SLOPES AND SURFACES A. The Contractor shall shape and grade the project site to conform to the proposed grade and/or sections shown on the drawings, and as directed by the Engineer. In any case, the Contractor shall grade the site to provide positive drainage away from buildings and towards roads and drainage facilities. The finished appearance shall be reasonably smooth and even (abrupt changes in slope shall not be used). The degree of finish for grading slopes shall be within a tolerance of 0.1 feet of plan grade* from either blade- grader operations, or by hand-shovel operations, as the Contractor may elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3.02 TOP SOIL A. See Section 02227 - Site and Parking Lot Excavation and Backfill for stockpiling topsoil and utilization of topsoil. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. The Contractor shall keep the site and structures free from accumulations of waste materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. Upon completion of the project and before requesting final inspection, the site and his work shall be "broom clean" or its equivalent. *NOTE: The Contractor shall provide finished grade 4" below plan grade in all turfed areas to allow for topsoil and sodding to finished plan grade. END OF SECTION 02210 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02225 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the structural excavation required to complete the project. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. Structural excavation shall include all material encountered including earth, asphalt, base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps, and roots. PART 3 EXECUTIONS 3.01 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: A. Excavation Safety: 1. The Contractor's excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) on excavation, trenching and shoring. B. Responsibility: 1. Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. 2. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. 3. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. 4. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims demands, and actions. 3.02 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: A. GENERAL: 1. The limit of excavation shall be such to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. B. VERTICAL SIDES: STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02225 – Page 1 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. When necessary to protect existing or proposed structures or other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the excavation. 2. The limit shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing. 4. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. C. SLOPING SIDES: 1. Where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. 2. The back slope shall be such that the excavation shall be safe from caving. 3. The type of material being excavated shall govern the back slope used. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the back slope used, but in any case the back slope shall be no steeper than 1 foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. DEWATERING 1. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well point, or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. 2. All dewatering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. 3. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a dewatered condition a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure, but in no case shall dewatering be terminated sooner than 7 days after placing concrete. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. 4. The excavation shall be protected from excessive rainfall and drying. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. 5. It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor provide a relatively smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the judge as to whether these conditions have been met. 6. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work. B. UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATION 1. Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that bear on earth shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. 2. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of at least 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. C. BACKFILL MATERIAL 1. General: STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02225 – Page 2 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02225 – Page 3 of 3 a. Suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. b. This material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. c. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 2. Excavated materials, which are to be used for, fill or backfill may be stockpiled on the site. The Engineer shall approve location of stockpiles. 3. Top soil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around structure. 4. Fiberglass Manholes and Wetwells: a. Sand shall be used for backfill around manholes and/or wetwells for a distance of 2 feet from the outside surface and extending from the bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the top slab. b. Suitable material (as set out above) chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of the backfill. c. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. D. SCHEDULE OF BACKFILLING 1. Concrete and Masonry Structures: a. The Contractor shall begin backfilling of concrete structures no sooner than 7 days but no later than 14 days, after they are cast. b. The Contractor shall backfill brick and mortar structures after they have been in place at least 3 days. 2. Fiberglass Manholes and Wetwells: a. The Contractor may begin backfilling of manholes and/or wetwells as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and any forms are removed. E. BACKFILL 1. General: a. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 9 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density A.S.T.M. Specification D-698. Flooding will NOT be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. 2. Fiberglass Manholes and Wetwells: a. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density. Flooding will NOT be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. F. EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL 1. All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled off the Contractor. END OF SECTION 02225 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02226 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the pipe trench excavation for all piping required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Trench excavation shall include all material encountered including dirt, asphalt, base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps and roots. Trench excavation will not be measured. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHES EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: A. TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY: 1. The Contractor's trench excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) on excavation, trenching and shoring. 3.02 RESPONSIBILITY: A. Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. B. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. C. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. D. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims demands, and actions. PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02226 – Page 1 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 3.04 TRENCHES 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: A. The Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the trench. The minimum and maximum width of trench is set out on the Drawings. B. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all shoring, bracing and sheeting. The Contractor shall remove shoring, bracing and sheeting, as the excavation is backfilled, in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A. The Contractor shall schedule the excavation of pipe trenches at such times and in such sequence as to present the least interference with other items of the work and the operation of the existing facilities. B. The Contractor shall place excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work, and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 3.06 UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATION: A. If the Contractor should excavate below the proposed trench grade (without authorization of the Engineer) the Contractor shall correct the grade by filling in with cement stabilized sand or crushed stone embedment as shown on the drawings. 3.07 TREES, STUMPS OR ROOTS: A. Where trees, stumps or roots are encountered, and they shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Roots shall be cut off flush with the sides of the trench. 3.08 ROCKS, BOULDERS, EXISTING STRUCTURES, ETC.: A. Where rocks, boulders, existing structures or other unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, they shall be removed by the Contractor to a depth of 12 inches below the grade line for the full width of the trench and refilled with cement or crushed stone embedment. 3.09 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW IN SEWERS AND DRAINS: A. The Contractor shall made adequate provision for maintaining the flow of sewers and drains encountered during construction. 3.10 DEWATERING: A. The Contractor shall keep the pipe trench free from water by use of bailing, pumping, well points or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. It is the intent of these specifications to install pipe on a firm dry bed. B. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The cessation of the dewatering operation will be accomplished during a sufficient period of time to insure that there is no displacement of the pipe due to unequal hydrostatic pressure. PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02226 – Page 2 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 3.11 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM: A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is a quicksand, muck or similar 1. All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet below bottom of pipe for pipe 2. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the by tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. 3.12 UNYIELDING TRENCH BOTTOM: A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is ledge rock, rocking or gravelly soil, hard pan or other unyielding material, such materials shall be removed prior to bedding the pipe. These materials shall be excavated for a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe and shall be replaced with crushed stone embedment. 3.13 SHAPING TRENCH BOTTOM: A. The bottom of the trench shall be undercut for bedding to support the bottom quadrant uniformly and for its entire length. Provide bell holes for couplings. The pipe shall be bedded in a foundation of stable material as shown in the project drawings and accurately shaped to fit the lower part of the pipe exterior. 3.14 BACKFILL MATERIAL: A. General: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for final backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps, or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. In areas not under existing or proposed pavement, the last 6 inches of backfill shall be topsoil. B. Select Backfill Material: When "select" backfill material is shown on the drawings, it shall be granular in nature, free of large clods, and have a plasticity index (P.I.) of less than 15. 3.15 INITIAL BACKFILL: A. Initial backfill is defined as that backfill from the bottom of the trench to 1 foot above the top of the pipe and shall be select. B. The Contractor shall place initial backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. C. Backfill below the top of the pipe shall be placed and compacted along the sides of the pipe equally to prevent strain on or displacement of the pipe. 3.16 FINAL BACKFILL: A. General: Final backfill is defined as that backfill from 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finished subgrade or ground line. See project drawings for special requirements under sidewalks and paved areas. B. Mechanically Tamped: The Contractor shall place final backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum density ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02226 – Page 3 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02226 – Page 4 of 4 C. Water Tamped: Not permissible in this project. 3.17 SAND EMBEDMENT: A. When sand embedment is required on the drawings, the material used for sand shall be "builders sand", sandy loam, or other sand material that shall contain no more than 25% clay and shall be free of rock, lumps or clods. B. The Engineer shall be the judge as to the suitability of a material for use as sand embedment. C. Sand embedment shall be used only when the excavated material is not suitable for use as sand embedment. D. If the trench bottom is in a soil that conforms to the requirements for sand embedment the 6 inches below the pipe need not be undercut. 3.18 CRUSHED STONE EMBEDMENT: A. When crushed stone embedment is required on the drawings, the material used for embedment shall be angular crushed stone, in the general size range of 3/4" to 1/16" which has good stability. Crushed stone shall be graded in accordance with Size #67 or #68 of AASHTO M 43, ASTM D 448. 3.19 CONCRETE EMBEDMENT: A. Concrete Embedment: When concrete embedment is required on the drawings, the concrete shall conform to Section 03300. Concrete embedment shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before placing initial backfill and at least 48 hours before placing final backfill unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 3.20 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: A. Excess and Unsuitable Material: All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled offsite by the Contractor and disposed of in a legal manner. END OF SECTION 02226 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02227 PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the site and parking lot excavation, subgrade preparation and backfill required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Comprehensive item for excavation and earthwork (dig up, move, use, remove, haul dispose) for all classes of material within site and parking lot area. Construct, shape, and finish all earthwork to specified line and grade. Compact earth subgrade where shown on plans, as cut section or embankment. Excess and waste becomes contractor's property unless otherwise specified. Contractor to furnish any borrow needed unless otherwise specified. Furnish and place topsoil where called for on plans. Excavate for side street transitions and nonconcrete driveway adjustments. PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION / CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 3.01 STRIPPING AND EXCAVATION: A. Strip top 6" in all areas to underlie compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing all humus, vegetation, other unsuitable materials. B. Remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving and structures within graded area which interfere with new construction or finished grade. C. Stockpile topsoil as defined in Section 02210 for future use in top 4" to provide finish grades as shown on grading plan. D. Dispose of silt, muck, organic materials and debris. Do not use in project. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION: A. Cut or build embankment in compacted layers, finish to specified line and grade. B. Subgrade is to be lime-stabilized (see Section 02245) and compacted to a density as indicated on the project drawings. C. Maintain moisture and density until covered by base. D. Dig out soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, recompact (especially utility trenches). 3.03 CURB BACKFILL AND TOP SOIL: A. Compact earth behind curbs without delay after curb completion. B. Top 3" (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finished earth grade shall be top soil as defined in Section 02210 excavated from the site. No excessive clods. PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02227 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02227 – Page 2 of 2 3.05 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: A. All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled offsite by the Contractor and disposed of in a legal manner. END OF SECTION 02227 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02228 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for excavation and fill required to obtain the finished site grades shown on the drawings necessary to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. No excavated asphalt, base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps and roots shall be used for fill. Only excavated material defined in Section 02200. 2.02 BALANCE OF CUT AND FILL A. The excavation (of suitable materials) and fill does not balance. The Contractor shall haul in suitable material or haul off excess material to provide the finished line and grades shown in the plans. PART 3 EXECUTION / CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall accomplish all site excavation as required to conform to the grades and sections shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall use suitable material taken from the site excavation, ditch excavation, street excavation and parking lot excavation to fill the site as required to conform to the grades and sections shown on the drawings. 3.02 TOP SOIL A. The Contractor shall schedule his operation so that the majority of the top soil excavated will be spread as the top layer of fill. 3.03 SHAPING AND GRADING B. “See Section 02210 "Site Grading". END OF SECTION 02228 SITE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02228 – Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02245 LIME STABILIZED SUB-GRADE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the lime slurry treatment for the subgrade when required by the drawings. Application of dry lime shall not be allowed. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCETS / MATERIAL 2.01 HYDRATED LIME: A. Hydrated lime shall be a standard brand conforming to the requirements of Item 264, Type A, of the Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications. 2.02 WATER: A. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, alkali, organic matter and other substances deleterious to the lime or lime-base mixture. 2.03 LIME SLURRY: A. Lime slurry shall conform to the requirements of Item 264, Type B, Grade 2 of the Texas Highway Department Standard Specification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT A. Any combination of equipment may be used that will produce a uniform lime subgrade mixture, free from loose or segregated areas and of uniform density and moisture. B. Tamping rollers 1. Tamping rollers, sheeps foot type, shall consist of one or more units. 2. Each unit shall consist of watertight cylindrical drum not less than 60 inches in length, surrounded by metal studs with tamping feet projecting not less than 7 inches from the surface of the drum and spaced not less than 6 inches nor more than 10 inches apart, measured diagonally from center to center. 3. The tamping feet shall be an approved type suitable for compacting subgrade courses. Each unit shall be equipped with a suitable device for cleaning the tamping feet. 4. The rolling units of multiple-type tamping rollers shall be pivoted on the main frame in a manner that will permit the units to adapt themselves to uneven ground surface and to rotate independently. 5. When fully loaded, the rollers shall produce a pressure of at least 750 pounds per square inch on the combined areas of the tamping feet in contact with the ground. C. Three-Wheel General Purpose Rollers: 1. Shall be self propelled, weighing not less than 10 tons and having a minimum compression of 300 pounds per inch width of rear wheel. The wheels of the rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers. LIME STABALIZED SUBGRADE 02245 – Page 1 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx D. Pneumatic-Tired Rollers 1. Shall be single or double axle vibrating or non-inflated type, equipped with tires of equal size and diameter, uniformly inflated, so that the air pressure of the several tires shall not vary more than 5 pounds per square inch. 2. Rollers may be self-propelled or towed by a suitably powered unit. The self-propelled roller, or the power unit and towed roller shall be considered a pneumatic-tired roller unit. a. Light Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall have two axles on which are mounted not less than 9 pneumatic-tired wheels in such a manner that the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group. The axles shall be mounted in a rigid frame provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The roller shall develop a compression of not less than 225 pounds per inch width of the tire tread and shall be capable of being unloaded to loads up to 300 pounds per inch of nominal tire width. The rollers shall be weighed as directed. b. Heavy Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall be of the vibratory or non-vibratory type with a minimum loading of 25,000 pounds per tire. The tires shall be suitable for inflation to not less than 90 p.s.i. The loading shall be distributed equally to all wheels. C. Tractors: Tractors shall be of the type suitable for compacting these courses. D. Blade Graders 1. Blade graders shall have a wheelbase of not less than 15 feet and a blade of not less than 10 feet and shall be self-propelled. E. Scarifiers 1. Scarifiers shall have two rows and the teeth in each row shall not be more than 8-inches apart. The rows of teeth shall be staggered so that the teeth furrows will not be more than 4-inches apart. F. Lime Slurry Equipment 1. The plan and equipment for the preparation and application of the lime slurry shall be approved prior to commencement of the work. Plant and equipment for the preparation of lime slurry shall be located as directed by the Engineer. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: A. No slurry shall be applied except when the air temperature is at least 40 degrees F in the shade and is rising. B. No slurry shall be applied to a sub grade that is frozen or contains frost. If the air temperature falls below 35 degrees F in the shade, completed lime-treated areas shall be protected by approved methods against any detrimental effects or freezing. C. Uncompacted soil-lime mixtures that are wet by rain so that the average moisture content at the time of compaction exceeds the tolerance specified shall be dried by aeration or other approved methods until the moisture content within the specified limits is obtained. LIME STABALIZED SUBGRADE 02245 – Page 2 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 3.03 SCARIFYING AND PRELIMINARY MIXING: A. Prior to the application of lime slurry the sub grade shall be scarified and thoroughly pulverized and mixed. B. Applications: Lime slurry shall be applied only on that area where the mixing operations can be completed the same day. 3.04 SLURRY PLACING: A. The lime slurry shall be placed by trucks equipped with approved distributors, and an agitator that will keep the lime and water in a consistent mixture. B. The distribution of lime at the rate specified shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section or area until the proper lime and moisture content has been secured. 3.05 RATE OF APPLICATION: A. The rate of application of lime treatment of the natural subgrade shall be determined by the Eades and Grim pH Test procedure, but shall not exceed 7.0% by dry weight. The optimum moisture shall be maintained within 2%. 3.06 MIXING: A. The mixing procedure shall be as hereinafter described: 1. First Mixing: a. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. b. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure 72 hours or as directed by the Engineer. c. During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed. 2. Final Mixing: a. After the required curing time, the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that, when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the No. 4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested in the field by laboratory sieves: PERCENT Minimum Passing 1" Sieve 100 LIME STABALIZED SUBGRADE 02245 – Page 3 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx LIME STABALIZED SUBGRADE 02245 – Page 4 of 4 Minimum Passing No. 4 Sieve 60 b. Old bituminous wearing surface shall be pulverized so that 100% will pass a 2" sieve. c. During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. 3.07 COMPACTION: A. Compaction shall be in layers (6" maximum-loose measure) to the uniform density as shown on the drawings. B. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than 3 calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the Engineer. C. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. D. Compaction shall begin at the bottom ad shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. E. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. The first layer of the treated material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. F. After compaction and shaping the surface shall be kept wet until the paving is applied to seal the sub grade. 3.08 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: A. SURFACE TEST: 1. After the sub grade is completely compacted to required density, the surface shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of grade as hereinabove set out. If any portions are found to lack required smoothness or failing accuracy of grade or crown, such portions shall be scarified, reshaped, recompacted and otherwise manipulated until the required smoothness and accuracy is obtained. The Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer shall make these tests. 2. Density: Field density tests will be taken in accordance with the provisions as set out in Section 02020 Site work Testing. END OF SECTION 02245 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02282 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. 1.06 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator and Contractor. 2. At the Owner's option, at the termination of the guarantee, an extension renewal of inspections and service treatment shall be made available to Winn-Dixie. TERMITE CONTROL 02282 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TERMITE CONTROL 02282 – Page 2 of 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements and concentrations: 1. Chloropyrifos ("Dursban TC"); 1.0 percent in water emulsion. 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", "Torpedo"); 0.5 percent in water emulsion. B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to Architect and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: C. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following rates of application: 1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers. 2. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material. 3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in trench. D. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gals. per 10 lin. ft. of penetration. E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 02282 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 02370 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 02370 DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED a. Bored end bearing cast-in-place concrete piers with reinforcing steel. 1.02 RELATED WORK a. Appendix A - Soil Investigation Data: Soil report. b. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. c. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Cut and fill to specified level and/or designated bearing elevation. d. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Specifications for concrete. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE a. No additional requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS a. Test Reports: Reports of all tests and inspections shall be forwarded to the Owner, the Architect, the Structural Engineer and the Contractor. Reports of tests shall state whether or not tests conform with contract documents. 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING a. No additional requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS a. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03300 and on drawings. b. Steel Casing: Of sufficient strength, diameter, length and construction to meet construction requirements as to safety and prevention of caving of soil and water penetration. 2.02 FABRICATION a. No additional requirements. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 02370 – Page 2 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECAUTIONS a. General Contractor shall employ drilling contractors who have adequate equipment to perform the required work. b. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of the project requirements, unit prices, and the need to properly staff the work to meet the construction schedule. c. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of all active underground utility lines. d. Where overhead power lines exist, observe proper clearances required by utility company. 3.02 INSTALLATION a. Drill concentric pier shafts. b. Clean pier bearing surface utilizing drilling equipment to expose a bearing surface free of loose material. Provide for the protection of workmen when in excavation according to OSHA requirements. Pier bearing shall be free of standing water, foreign matter, or loose material. c. Allow inspection of pier shafts prior to reinforcing steel and concrete placement. Prevent foreign matter from falling into pier hole. d. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03300. e. Place concrete within eight (8) hours after pier hole is cleaned and in accordance with Section 03300. Use equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. Vibrate concrete full depth of pier. f. Provide dowels for connection plinth and grade beams. g. Place concrete through a temporary casing if an inflow of subsurface water occurs. Place concrete to height sufficient to effect seal. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a. The Architect will inspect construction throughout the various work stages. In addition, the Architect prior to the placing of concrete will inspect the formwork and placement of reinforcement. b. Notify the Architect and Owner's testing agency at least 72 hours in advance, excluding Saturday and Sunday, before drilling piers. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 3.04 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES a. Provide continuous inspection of pier drilling operations to ascertain compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. b. Determine that proper bearing strata is obtained and utilized for bearing and that shafts are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. c. Notify Architect if soil or water conditions require casing of piers. d. Prepare and submit inspection reports of pier drilling which shall contain following: i. Pier mark with location as established on the drawings, using grid lines as references. ii. Pier diameter and bell size. iii. Pier bearing elevation (depth) as calculated from finish floor elevation. iv. Depth of penetration into bearing strata. v. Condition of bottom of excavation. vi. Plumbness deviation. vii. Description of unusual conditions encountered, including ground water and if casing was used, size and depth of casing. viii. Size, number and length of rebar placed. ix. Record of deviations from Contract Document requirements. e. Perform concrete testing in accordance with Section 03300. 3.05 TOLERANCES a. Maximum: 1" in l0' from vertical for plumb piers. b. Top: Maximum 2 inches from location indicated. 3.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE A. Contractor shall be responsible for additional work as may be required to correct work, which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength and tolerances. END OF SECTION 02370 DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 02370 – Page 1 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02480 LANDSCAPING PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY: A. This section includes provisions for the following items: 1. Preparation and excavation of planting beds. 2. Planting of trees, shrubs, sod, seed, and associated materials. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Excavation, filling, and fine and finish grading required establishing elevations shown on drawings. 1.04 UTILITIES: A. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agree upon by parties concerned. 1.05 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock B. American Sod Producer Association (ASPA) C. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA) D. Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Condition of new plant materials is responsibility of Contractor and shall be approved by Owner. Owner reserves right to inspect and reject plants at any time and place. B. Measure plants when branches are in their normal position. C. Trees and shrubs shall meet requirements for spread, height, or container size stated in The Drawings. 1. Measurements shall be taken from ground level to average height of shrub and not to longest branch. 2. Height and spread dimensions specified herein refer to main body of trees measured from crown of roots to tip of top branch. D. Caliper measurements shall be taken at point on tree trunk 6 inches above natural ground line for trees up to 4 inches in caliper, and at point 12 inches above natural ground line for trees exceeding 4 inches in caliper. E. If range of sizes is given, no plant shall be less than minimum size, and at least 50 percent of plants shall be as large as upper half of range specified. F. Measurements specified are minimum size acceptable and, where pruning is required, are measurements after pruning. G. Subcontractors: 1. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 1 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx H. Sources: 1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. 4. Sandy Loam: Before delivery of sandy loam, furnish Architect with written statement giving location of properties from which sandy loam is to be obtained. 5. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. 6. Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees of shrubs immediately from project site. 2.02 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division Specification Sections. 1. Plant and Material Certifications: a) Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities b) Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. B. Planting Schedule: 1. Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. C. Maintenance Instructions: 1. Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. 2. Instructions shall address; trees, shrubs, ground cover and lawns. 2.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Packaged materials 1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at site. 2.04 PLANT MATERIALS: A. Plant material (trees and shrubs) shall conform to requirements of ANSI Z60.1 of rules and grading upgraded to meet the following: 1. Plants shall be of selected specimen quality, exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry. Plants shall have normal habit or sound, healthy, vigorous plants with well developed root system. 2. Plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. 3. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 2 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 4. Trees with abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 1 1/4-inch, which have not completely calloused, shall be rejected. 5. Plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have normal habit of growth and be legibly tagged with proper name. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those of site or have been acclimated to such condition for at least 2 years. 6. Root system of each plant shall be well-provided with fibrous roots. Parts shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, well-branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. 7. Plants designated ball and burlap shall be moved with root systems as solid units with balls of earth firmly wrapped with burlap and comply with the following: a. Diameter and depth of balls of earth shall be sufficient to encompass fibrous root feeding systems necessary for healthy development of plant. b. No plant shall be accepted when ball of earth surrounding its roots has been badly cracked or broken preparatory to or during process of planting. Balls shall remain intact during all operations. c. Plants that cannot be planted at once shall be heeled-in by setting in ground and covering balls with soil or mulch and then watering. d. Hemp burlap and twine is preferable to treated. If treated burlap is used, twine shall be cut from around trunk and burlap shall be removed. 8. Trunk of each tree shall be single trunk growing from single unmutilated crown of roots. No part of trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal trees of same variety. 9. Thickness of each shrub shall correspond to trade classification "No.1". Single- stemmed or thin plants shall not be accepted. Side branches shall be generous, well-twigged, and plant as whole well-branched to ground. Plants shall be in moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 2.05 LAWN SEED A. Lawn seed mixture shall be fresh, clean new crop seed. Furnish to Owner dealers guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentage of purity and germination of each variety. B. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed. Seed mixtures vary by region and season and shall comply with State DOT and Local Soil Conservation Service Standards for lawn turf. 2.06 SOD A. Sod shall be ASPA certified, species suitable as lawn turf for the region. Sod shall be strongly rooted, weed, disease, pest free and uniform in thickness. 2.07 TOPSOIL A. Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing characteristics of representative topsoil in the vicinity that produces heavy growth. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.4 percent, free from subsoil, objectionable weeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1-inch in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic substances, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. Top soil shall contain a minimum of two percent organic material. B. Verify amount stockpiled if any, and supply additional as needed from naturally well-drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep. Do not obtain topsoil from bogs or marshes. 2.08 FERTILIZER A. Deliver fertilizer, mixed as specified, in original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, or manufacturer's certificate of LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 3 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to Owner. Store fertilizer in such manner that it shall be kept dry. B. Base percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash on laboratory test recommendations as approved by Owner. For bidding assume 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent phosphorus, and 4 percent potash by weight. At least 50 percent of total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3 percent water-insoluble nitrogen. At least 60 percent of nitrogen content shall be derived from super-phosphate containing not less than 18 percent phosphoric acid or bone meal containing 25 - 30 percent phosphoric acid and 2 - 3 percent nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55 - 60 percent potash. 2.09 PEAT MOSS A. Peat moss shall be Michigan peat moss or approved equal in color and consistency. B. Peat moss shall be moss peat, finely shredded to pass 1/2-inch mesh and shall be no less than 90 percent organic material by weight, with ash content by ignition of no more than 10 percent. C. Material shall contain 35 - 66 percent moisture by weight, but shall have water-holding capacity of 150 - 200 percent. D. Material shall have pH value of 4 to 5. E. Material may be imported supplied in bales or domestic furnished in bulk. If furnished in bulk, material and its source shall be acceptable to Owner. 2.10 SHREDDED HARDWOOD BARK MULCH A. Mulch shall be of sufficient character as not to be easily displaced by wind or water runoff. 2.11 STAKING MATERIAL A. Stakes shall be 8-ft steel tee posts. Three stakes shall be used for each tree. B. Wire used for tree staking shall be pliable No. 12 galvanized soft steel wire. C. Hose shall be 2-ply fibred-bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2-inch inside diameter, black or green, and of suitable length. 2.12 WATER A. Potable water shall be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering equipment. 2.13 WEED MAT A. Weed mat shall be 4.1 oz., woven polypropylene, needle-punched fabric, weed barrier 2.14 STEEL EDGING A. Steel edging shall be 1/8-inch x 4-inch interlocking steel edge, staked with metal stakes sufficiently to hold in place. 2.15 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET A. Rolled erosion control products shall follow the type and material composition as per the Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) standard specification recommendations. 2.15 WIRE: A. Shall be a minimum 12 GA zinc-coated. 2.17 HOSE: A. Shall be of suitable length, 2 ply, reinforced green rubber and 3/4" and ½" in diameter. LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 4 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2.18 "T" POST: A. Painted green, 6 ½' length, metal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. If project completion date prohibits in-season planting, prepare for out-of-season seeding or sodding so that lawns shall be completed and ready for acceptance at time of project completion. B. Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated by one or more of the following: 1. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to excessive compaction caused by heavy equipment and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or A7, loosen such areas with spikes, discing, or other means to loosen soil to condition acceptable to Owner. Loosen soil to minimum depth of 12 inches with additional loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or organic matter into the subsoil to obtain adequate drainage. Such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 2. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to presence of boards, mortar, concrete, or other construction materials in sub-grade and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or A7, remove debris and objectionable material. Such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 3. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because natural subsoil falls into AASHTO classification of A6 or A7 and contains moisture in excess of 30 percent, then installation of sub-drainage system or other means described elsewhere in Specifications shall be used. Where such conditions have not been known or revealed prior to planting time and they have not been recognized in preparation of The Drawings and Specifications, then Owner shall issue pricing order to install proper remedial measures. C. Perform planting operations at steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it impossible to work. No plant material shall be planted in frozen ground. D. Disk, drag, harrow, or hand rake subgrade to depth of 4 inches and removed stones larger than 1-1/2 inches to provide bond for topsoil. Topsoil, which must be transported across finished sidewalks, shall be delivered in such manner that no damage will be done to sidewalks. E. Do not place topsoil until subgrade has been approved in accordance with Section 02300. Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones, debris, and roots. Compact topsoil to form layer with minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 12 inches in shrub beds. Place topsoil so that after final settlement there will be positive drainage conforming to elevations shown on the Drawings. F. Tree and Shrub Preparation 1. Dig bare-rooted shrubs with adequate fibrous roots. Cover roots with uniformly thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed in moist straw or moss. 2. Dig ball and burlap plants with firm natural balls of earth of diameter and depth to include fibrous roots. 3. Protect roots or balls of plants at all times from sun and drying winds. 4. Ball and burlap plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on ground and protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material. Heel-in bare rooted plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery. All shall be kept moist. 5. Open and separate bundles of plants before roots are covered. Prevent air pockets among roots. During planting operations, cover bare roots with canvas, LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 5 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx hay, or other suitable material. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope which will result in damage to bark or branches. G. Seed Bed Preparation 1. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt. Float areas to smooth, uniform grade as indicated on the Drawings. Lawn areas shall slope to drain. 2. Where no grades are shown, areas shall have smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls, such as walks, curbs, catch basin, steps, or building, and elevations shown on The Drawings. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Finish grades shall meet approval of Owner before grass seed is sown. 3. Loosen soil to depth of 6 inches in lawn areas by approved method of scarification and grade to remove ridges and depressions. Remove stones or foreign matter over 2 inches in diameter from top 2 inches of soil. Float lawn areas to finish grades. 4. Seed beds shall be permitted to settle or shall be firmed by rolling before seeding begins. H. Sod Bed Preparation: Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt, stones, debris, etc. and floating areas to smooth, uniform grade as indicated on The Drawings. Lawn areas shall be graded to drain. I. Fertilizer Application: Apply fertilizer in two applications and water immediately following each application. The first application shall be one week prior to seeding/sodding at the rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet and barrowed into the top two inches of topsoil. The second application shall be at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet immediately following the second mowing. 3.02 PROTECTION A. Before commencing work, trees and shrubs that are to be saved shall be protected from damage by placement of fencing flagged for visibility or some other suitable protective procedure approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible for replacing saved trees or shrubs for a period of one year after project completion. B. Trucks or other equipment shall not be driven or parked within drip line of any tree unless tree overspreads paved area. C. Use precautionary measures when performing work around trees, sidewalks, pavements, utilities, and other features either existing or previously installed. D. Adjust depth of earthwork and topsoil when working immediately adjacent to aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining sidewalks and pavements, and damage in general to other features either existing or previously installed. E. Cover plants transported to project in open vehicles with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to body of vehicle to prevent injury to plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of plants. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or storage shall be cause for rejection. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such protection shall encompass entire period during which plants are in transit, being handled, or are in temporary storage. F. Plants shall not be delivered to the site more than seven days prior to planting. If plants transported to site will not be planted within 48 hours of delivery, they will be healed in (covered with sawdust, soil or mulch), and the containers or balls protected from wind and temperature and kept moist until planting. G. Where excavating, fill, or grading is required within drip line of trees that are to remain, work shall be performed as follows: 1. Trenching: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, tree roots shall not be cut but trench shall be tunneled under or around roots by careful hand digging without injury to roots. 2. Raising Grades: LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 6 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx a. Where fill not exceeding 16 inches is required, clean, washed gravel graded from 1 inch to 2 inches in size shall be placed directly around tree trunk. Extend gravel out from trunk on all sides minimum of 18 inches and finish approximately 2 inches above finished grade at tree. Install gravel before any earth fill is placed. New earth fill shall not be left in contact with trunks of trees requiring fill. b. Where fill exceeding 16 inches is required, construct dry-laid tree well around trunk of tree. Tree well shall extend out from trunk on all sides minimum of 3 feet and to 3 inches above finish grade. Place coarse- graded rock directly around tree well extending out to drip line of tree. Place clean, washed gravel graded from 1 inch to 2 inches in size directly over coarse rock to depth of 3 inches. Place approved backfill material directly over washed gravel to desired finish grade. 3. Lowering Grades: Existing trees in areas where new finish grade is to be lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation indicated on The Drawings. Roots as required shall be cut cleanly 3 inches below finished grade and scars covered with tree paint. 4. Trees marked for preservation that are more than 6 inches above proposed grades shall stand on broad rounded mounds and graded smoothly into lower level. Trees located more than 16 inches above proposed grades shall have dry- laid stone wall or other retaining structure as detailed on The Drawings constructed minimum of 5 feet from trunk. Exposed or broken roots shall be cut clean and covered with topsoil. 3.03 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING A. Plants too large for 2 persons to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with sling. Do not rock trees in holes to raise. B. If rock or other underground obstruction is encountered, Owner may require plant pits to be relocated, pits enlarged, or plants deleted from project. C. Make adjustments in locations as directed. In event that pits or areas for planting are prepared and backfilled with topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations, they shall be so marked that when planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, change location under direction of Owner without charge. D. Holes for trees shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 6 inches deeper than root ball. Holes for shrubs and vines shall be at least 12 inches greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 2 feet deep. E. During backfilling of tree holes and shrub beds with topsoil, manure, ground limestone (if soil tests indicate it is needed), and commercial fertilizer at rate of 3 pounds for trees up to 3 inches in caliper, 1 pound per inch caliper for larger trees, 6 ounces for small shrubs and 8 ounces for each shrub 4 feet or over shall be added as progress of work permits. Omit ground limestone and manure in case of acid soil plants. Manure, limestone, and fertilizer shall be thoroughly mixed with topsoil in planting operation. Manure shall not come in immediate contact with roots. F. Plants shall be planted in center of holes and at same depth as they had previously grown. Backfill topsoil in layers of not more than 8 inches and each layer watered sufficiently to settle before next layer is placed. Tamp loam under edges of balled plants. Use enough topsoil to bring surfaces to finish grade when settled. 1. Provide saucer around each plant as shown on The Drawings. 2. Soak plants with water twice within first 24 hours after time of planting. Apply water with low pressure so as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging topsoil. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS A. Shredded Hardwood Bark Mulch 1. Use 4 inches of shredded hardwood bark mulch or approved equal as top LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 7 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx dressing in planting beds. Mulch single trees or shrubs to outside edge of saucer. 2. Weed mat shall be placed under planting areas that will not to be seeded. In addition, the contractor shall place weed mat in any other locations as directed on the construction drawings. Weed mat shall be covered with 4 inches of shredded hardwood bark mulch and secured in place with soil staples. B. Use peat moss for planting soil mixture only and not be used as mulch, except on ground cover. C. Peg sodded slopes greater than 3:1 to hold in place. D. Areas to be covered with erosion control blankets shall be properly prepared, fertilized, and seeded before blanket is applied. When blanket is unrolled, netting shall be on top and fibers in contact with soil. In ditches, apply blanket in direction of flow of water. On slopes, apply blankets vertically on slope. Overlap ends and sides 6” and staple to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 SEEDING A. Do not perform seeding in windy conditions. B. Seeding shall be dispersed in 2 directions at right angles to each other. C. Seed lawn areas by sowing evenly with approved mechanical seeder at rate of minimum of 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Culti-packer or approved similar equipment may be used to cover seed and to form seedbed in 1 operation. In areas inaccessible to culti-packer, lightly rake seeded ground with flexible rakes and roll with water ballast roller. After rolling, seeded areas shall be lightly mulched with wheat straw. D. Surface layer of soil for seeded areas shall be kept moist during germination period. Water seeded areas twice first week to minimum depth of 6 inches with fine spray and once per week thereafter as necessary to supplement natural rain to equivalent of 6 inches depth. 3.06 SODDING A. A 1'-6" wide strip shall be sodded along sidewalks, roadways, and parking areas to prevent washing and erosion. B. Cut and lay sod on same day. Only healthy vigorous growing sod shall be laid. C. Lay sod across slope and tightly together to result in solid coverage free of gaps. D. Roll or firmly but lightly tamp new sod with suitable wooden or metal tamper sufficiently to set or press sod into underlying soil. E. After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly water newly-sodded areas. 3.07 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. Plants shall be watered, mulched, weeded, pruned, sprayed, fertilized, cultivated, and otherwise maintained and protected until acceptance. Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and position, planting saucer restored, and dead material removed and replaced. Tighten and repair stakes and wires. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. B. Maintain lawns for at least 30 days after sodding and 60 days after seeding, or as long as is necessary to establish uniform stand of the specified grasses, or until substantial completion of project, or until acceptance of lawns, whichever is later. C. In event that lawn operations are completed too late in Fall for adequate germination and/or growth, maintenance shall continue into following growing season or until uniform stand of specified grasses has been established. D. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil and adjust watering schedule established by irrigation system installer to fit conditions. E. After grass growth has started, areas that fail to show uniform stand of grass for any reason whatsoever shall be reseeded in accordance with The Drawings and as LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 8 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx specified herein. Such areas shall be reseeded repeatedly until areas are covered with satisfactory growth of grass at no additional cost to Owner. Topsoil conditioning or removal and replacement shall be performed if required to facilitate establishment of grass at no cost to Owner. F. Watering shall be done in such manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by Owner to assure continued growth of healthy grass. Water areas of site in such a manner as to prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid damage to finished surface due to watering equipment. G. Water for execution and maintenance shall be provided by Contractor at no expense to Owner. Contractor shall furnish portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, connections, nozzles, and any other equipment required to transport water from available outlets and apply it to seeded areas in approved manner. H. Initiate mowing of seeded areas when grass has attained height of 3 inches. Maintain grass height at 2 1/2 to 3 inches at subsequent cuttings depending on time of year. Not more than 1/3 of grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not occur more than 10 days apart. I. Heavy cuttings shall be removed to prevent destruction of underlying turf. If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother planted species, such vegetation shall be mowed or, in case of rank growths, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from area by methods approved by Owner. J. Protect seeded area from pedestrian or vehicular trespassing while grass is germinating. Provide fences, signs, barriers, or other necessary temporary protective devices. Repair damage resulting from trespass, erosion, washout, settlement, or other causes. K. Remove fences, signs, barriers, or other temporary protective devices after final acceptance. L. If a substantial number of plants are diseased, distressed, or dead at time of inspection, acceptance will not be granted and Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of plants shall be extended until replacements are made. M. Replacements shall be plants of same variety and size specified on The Drawings. Furnish and plant as specified herein. Cost shall be borne by Contractor. Replacements resulting from removal, loss, or damage due to occupancy of project in any part, vandalism, physical damage by animals, vehicles, etc., and losses due to curtailment of water by local authorities will be approved and paid for by Owner. N. Remove and replace dead, defective and/or rejected plants as required before final acceptance. Replacement of plant materials that may be necessary shall be at expense of Contractor. O. Grassed areas damaged during process of work shall be responsibility of Contractor, who shall restore disturbed areas to condition satisfactory to Owner. This may include filling to grade, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching. P. Guarantee plants for period of 2 years after inspection and acceptance. Q. At end of Establishment Period, inspection shall be made again. Remove from site any plant that is dead or unsatisfactory to Owner. Replace plants during normal planting season. 3.08 MAINTENANCE AFTER CONSTRUCTION A. Maintenance after construction shall be commenced upon completion of a Maintenance Agreement based on proposal submitted by the Contractor specified in Part 1 above. The Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance work shall conform to the following requirements. B. General Landscaping 1. Landscape maintenance shall include necessary watering, cultivation, weeding, pruning, wound dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, labor for replacement of dead plant material, straightening plants which lean or sag, adjustments of plants which settle or are planted too low, mowing, replacement of mulch that has been displaced, repairing and reshaping of LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 9 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx saucers, and reseeding or replanting of those areas affected. Remove rubbish, waste, tools, and equipment used at end of each workday. Other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice necessary to ensure vigorous, healthy growth of plant material are also part of Maintenance Contract. 2. During first year of Maintenance Contract, replacement of plant material shall be responsibility of Contractor with exceptions as listed herein. 3. Landscape maintenance contractor shall purchase and maintain Contractor's general liability insurance in amount of $1,000,000 for protection from Contractor's operations under Maintenance Contract. Certification of such insurance shall be filed with Owner prior to commencement of work. C. Watering 1. The Owner’s irrigation system shall be used by landscape maintenance contractor for watering. Failure of system does not relieve landscape maintenance contractor's responsibility of maintaining desired level of moisture necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. 2. Water shall be applied in quantities sufficient to penetrate soil to minimum depth of 8-inches in shrub beds and 6-inches in turf areas at rate that will prevent saturation of soil. 3. On-site water will be furnished by Owner. Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering equipment. D. Weeding: Landscape maintenance contractor shall keep areas free from weeds and undesirable grasses by approved methods and materials . E. Disease and insect pest control: Inspect plant material at least once each month to locate any disease or insect pest infestations. Upon discovery of infestation, nature or species of infestation shall be identified. Control in accordance with industry standards shall be immediately implemented. F. Fertilizing: Landscape maintenance contractor shall fertilize on regularly scheduled program to fit requirements of plant material to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. Spilled or excess fertilizer shall be swept and properly disposed. Flushing into storm sewer is prohibited. G. Pruning and repair: Amount of pruning shall be limited to minimum necessary to remove dead or injured branches, to compensate for loss of roots as result of transplanting operations, and to maintain safety in traveled areas. Pruning shall not change the natural habit or attractive, balanced shape of plant. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. H. Mowing: Mow grass areas at regular intervals to keep grass height from exceeding 3-inches. Mow in such manner as to prevent clippings from blowing onto paved areas and sidewalks. Cleanup after mowing shall include sweeping or blowing to clear mowing debris. I. Clean up: During course of maintenance, excess and waste materials shall be continuously and promptly removed at end of each workday. J. Maintenance report and schedule of activities: Landscape maintenance contractor shall provide schedule and report to Owner that details planned maintenance activities including names of any subcontractors. K. General Irrigation: 1. After extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement has expired, landscape maintenance contractor shall maintain irrigation system in good operating condition through monthly inspections of system components and make repairs as necessary. This includes checking and verifying operation in each zone, alignment of heads, rain sensors, controller, and checking leaks. 2. Landscape maintenance contractor shall make every effort to conserve water by adjusting programming to allow for weather changes and growth seasons. Irrigation should be conducted between 2:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. unless requested by Owner. L. Winterization: LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 10 of 11 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx LANDSCAPING 02480 – Page 11 of 11 1. When cold weather approaches and chance for freezing conditions exist, the irrigation system shall be drained after each use. 2. Winterization procedure shall include the following: a. Shut water off at main gate valve b. Open manual drain valves c. Blow out each section twice with compressed air d. Set controller to cycle through each section minimum time available, once each day through winter months. e. If backflow preventor is installed with unions, remove and store out of weather. M. Spring Start-up: Spring start-up procedure shall include the following: 1. Reinstall backflow prevention 2. Close manual drain valves 3. Slowly turn water on 4. Check for leaks and proper alignment of heads 5. Repair and adjust system as required for proper operation N. Component Replacement: If replacement of component parts becomes necessary after normal use and after original warranty has expired, Owner is responsible for expense of replacements, provided there has been no mishandling of these items on part of landscape maintenance contractor. 0. Termination Of Maintenance Contract: 1. If Owner fails to make payment for period of 90 days without written clarification, landscap reasonable profit and damages applicable to Maintenance Contract. 2. If landscape maintenance contractor defaults, persistently fails, or neglects to carry out work in accordance with Maintenance Contract, Owner, after 12 days written notice to landscape maintenance contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies, including compensation for additional services made necessary, and deduct cost from payment due landscape maintenance contractor or Owner may terminate Maintenance Contract. END OF SECTION 02480 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02482 HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS PART 1 GENERAL: 1.01 CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS: A. The Contractor will visit the site to examine the conditions, as they exist, determine the nature of the materials to be used, and all other facts pertinent to the work. 1.02 PROTECTION: A. Loss or damage of hydromulching, whether by theft, vandalism, fire, flood, lightning, storms, freezes, insects, disease, etc., rests solely with the Contractor until final acceptance by Owner. 1.03 DELIVERY: A. Hydromulching material shall be delivered to the site only after the berms are prepared and are ready for planting. 1.04 DAMAGES: A. Any areas damaged through landscape operations pertaining to this contract will be fully restored to their original condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPLIES: A. The Contractor will supply all tools, hoses, and other equipment for performance of specified maintenance. The Contractor at his expense shall furnish hose and other watering equipment required for the work. B. This cost will be included in the bid proposal. 2.02 HYDROMULCHING-BERMUDA GRASS SEED: A. Quantities: 2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 2.03 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER: A. Quantities: 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 2.04 MULCH: A. Use mulch with tackifier on all berms indicated on the landscape plan, at the rate of 1 1/2 pounds of Fiber Tack, per 1,000 square feet. B. Apply the mulch, taking extreme care not to spray the material outside the lawn areas, by using a 4'x8'bafter board along all bed and concrete areas. 2.05 FERTILIZER: A. Shall be (13-13-13) at 2lbs per l,000 square feet. HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS 02482 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS 02482 – Page 2 of 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAWN PREPARATION: A. Tilling and Grading: 1. Areas that have become hardened and non-porous because of construction activities, shall be loosened by rototilling, disking, harrowing, or any approved method. 2. All areas to receive seed will be hand and machine raked and graded after tilling. Remove all large lumps of clay, debris, stones, etc., before hydromulching. 3.02 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE: A. After hydromulching, maintain the lawn area and keep constantly moist until the seed has germinated and the grass begins to spread. After this, water the grass less frequently but more thoroughly at each watering. B. The Contractor will be responsible for watering and necessary maintenance of all installed materials until final acceptance by the Owner. Maintenance will include: 1. Weeding. 2. Mowing. 3. Edging grass. 4. Watering. C. Water will be available on the site at no expense to the Contractor. 3.02 CLEANUP: A. All areas are to be kept as neat and clean as possible during the installation process. All trash and debris generated will be removed from the project daily. B. Final clean up will include removal of all landscape debris from the site. All walks and curbs will be broomed cleaned, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 02482 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02486 SOD WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY OF SECTION A. This section includes provisions for the following items: 1. Topsoil placement and procedure 2. Sodding 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Topsoil stockpiling is specified in Division 2 section "Site Clearing". 2. Excavation, filling, and rough grading required establishing elevations shown on drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork." 3. Underground sprinkler system is specified in a separate Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: B. Plant and Material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. 2. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 3. Label data substantiating those plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirements. C. Maintenance instruction: 1. Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of required maintenance period(s). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractors 1. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. B. Source Quality Control 1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. SOD WORK 02486 – Page 1 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of equivalent material. 1.06 ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: A. Package standard products with manufacturers certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL: A. Provide topsoil, dark brown in color, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 1. Obtain Topsoil from local sources. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where soil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not obtain from bogs or marshes. 2.02 FERTILIZER, GRASS AND STARTER FERTILIZER: A. Granular non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, guaranteed analysis, professional fertilizer containing 16% nitrogen, 1 0% phosphoric acid, and 5% potash by weight or similar composition. 2.03 GRASS MATERIALS / SOD A. Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old, free of weeds and undesirable native grasses, and machine out to pad thickness of 3/4 inch (plus or minus 1/4 inch), excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. B. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent deviation in either length or width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10% of pad with be rejected. C. Provide sod composed principally of following: Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. Before placing clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B. Spread topsoil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. C. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag lawn areas, remove edges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. SOD WORK 02486 – Page 2 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 3.02 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS: A. Loosen sub grade of lawn areas by discing or tiling to a minimum depth of 2 inches and a maximum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones measuring over 1 ½" in any dimension. Remove sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. B. Spread topsoil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. C. Place approximately ½ of total amount of topsoil required. Work into top of loosened sub grade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil. 3.03 PREPARATION OF UNCHANGED GRADES: A. Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: Till to a depth of not less than 4 inches. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter. B. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepared for lawns. C. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. D. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at 2 pounds per 100 sq. ft. upon completed soil mixture. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days. E. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted immediately after grading. F. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 3.04 SODDING FIELDS: A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade after watering sod. Work sifted sandy loam into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting and roll. 3.05 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During sodding work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect sodding work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Repair damaged landscape work as directed. SOD WORK 02486 – Page 3 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SOD WORK 02486 – Page 4 of 4 C. Remove excess unused topsoil from the site in accordance with Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 02486 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02518 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete paver units. [Concrete paver edge units.] B. Bedding and joint sand. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS NONE 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. 3. C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 5. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. 6. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 7. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop. 8. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop. 9. D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of concrete interlocking pavers for a minimum of three (3) years. B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost. C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product drawings and data. B. Submit full size sample sets of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections. Color will be selected by Architect/Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner from manufacturer's available colors. C. Submit sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand. D. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936. E. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project formed details. INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 1 of 6 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx F. Substitutions: Substitutions shall be submitted 10 days prior to bid opening for acceptance. 1.06 MOCK-UPS A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area as described in Article 3.02. This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged. Consideration shall be given with regard to differences in age of materials from time of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product. B. Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind.The covering shall be secured in place. C. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. B. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials. C. Do not install frozen sand. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE PAVERS Concrete pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. These insure a minimum joint width between each unit into which sand is placed. Spacer bars help prevent contact of the edges with adjacent pavers and subsequent spalling. They are highly recommended for mechanically installed pavers. Manually installed pavers may be installed with or without spacer bars. A. Concrete pavers shall be supplied by Pavestone Company. B. Product name(s)/shape(s), color(s), overall dimensions, and thickness of the paver(s) shall be: 2003 ADA Compliant 3 7/8 in./ 98 mm x 7 13/16in./198 mm x 2 3/8 in./ 60 mm thick. C. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units: 1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 2 of 6 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with ASTM C 67. D. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. E. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. F. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced unit. 2.02 VISUAL INSPECTION A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for rejection. 2.03 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Owner or his authorized representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936 82 for sampling of material prior to commencement of paver placement. B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested in compliance with ASTM C-140. C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) specimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a fraction thereof. D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test required for an average value. Testing of full units is preferred. 2.04 REJECTION A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owner from the retained lot and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 2.05 EXPENSE OF TESTS A. The expense of inspection and testing shall be borne by the Owner. 2.06 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND The type of sand used for bedding is often called sand that is suitable for the manufacturing of concrete. Sands vary regionally. Screenings and stone dust can be unevenly graded and have an excess amount of material passing the No. 200 (75 Hm) sieve. Bedding sands with these INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 3 of 6 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx characteristics should not be used. Contact paver contractors local to the project and confirm sand(s) successfully used in previous similar applications. Limestone sand should not be used for bedding sand. Mason sands are typically acceptable only for joint sand, provided they meet grading requirements as shown in Table 2 of this section. A. Bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter. The sand shall be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Limestone screenings or stone dust shall not be used. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available. B. Grading of sand samples for the bedding course and joints shall be done according to ASTM C136. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600 µm) No. 50 (300 µm) No. 100 (150 µm) 100 95 to 100 85 to 100 50 to 85 25 to 60 10 to 30 2 to 10 Bedding sand may be used for joint sand. However, extra effort in sweeping and compacting the pavers may be required in order to completely fill the joints. If joint sand other than bedding sand is used, the gradations shown in Table 2 are recommended. Joint sand should never be used for bedding sand. C. The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown in Table 2 below: Table 2 Grading for Joint Sand ASTM C 144 Sieve Size Natural Sand Percent Passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 8 (2.36 mm) No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600 µm) No. 50 (300 µm) No. 100 (150 µm) 100 95 to 100 70 to 100 40 to 75 10 to 35 2 to 15 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 4 of 6 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx No. 200 (75 µm) 0 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION For installations on a compacted aggregate base and soil subgrade, the specifier should be aware that the top surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above the final elevations after compaction. This difference in initial and final elevations is to compensate for possible minor settling. A. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifi- cations. Compaction of the soil subgrade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698 is recommended. Higher density, or compaction to ASTM D 1557 may be necessary for areas subject to continual vehicular traffic. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils. The Architect/Engineer should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. B. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to specifications. C. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications. Local aggregate base materials typical to those used for flexible pavements or those conforming to ASTM D 2940 are recommended. Compaction to not less than 95% Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D 698 is recommended for pedestrian areas. Compaction to not less than 98% Modified Proctor Density according to ASTM D 1557 is recommended for vehicular areas. The aggregate base should be spread and compacted in uniform layers not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) thickness. Recommended base surface tolerance should be plus or minus 3/8 in. (10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) straight edge. The Architect/Engineer should inspect geotextile materials and placement (if appli-cable), base preparation, surface tolerances, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. Mechanical tampers are recommended for compaction of soil subgrade and aggregate base around lamp standards, utility structures, building edges, curbs, tree wells and other protrusions. In areas not accessible to roller compaction equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers. D. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter area to be paved. E. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads. F. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Spread the sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, not exceeding 1-1/2 in. (40 mm) thickness. The screeded sand should not be INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 5 of 6 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 – Page 6 of 6 disturbed. Place sufficient sand to stay ahead of the laid pavers. Do not use the bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface. B. Ensure that pavers are free of foreign materials before installation. C. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown on the drawings. Maintain straight pattern lines. D. Joints between the pavers on average shall be between 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. (2 mm to 5 mm) wide. Some paver shapes require a larger joint. Consult manufacturer for recommended joint widths. E. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units. Units cut no smaller than one-third of a whole paver are recommended along edges subject to vehicular traffic. F. Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a double blade paver splitter or masonry saw. G. Use a low amplitude, high frequency plate vibrator to vibrate the pavers into the sand. Use Table 3 below to select size of compaction equipment: Table 3 Paver Thickness Minimum Centrifugal Compaction Force 60 mm 3000 Ibs. (13 kN) 80 mm 5000 Ibs. (22 kN) H. Vibrate the pavers, sweeping dry joint sand into the joints and vibrating until they are full. This will require at least two or three passes with the vibrator. Do not vibrate within 3 ft. (1 m) of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. I. All work to within 3 ft. (1 m) of the laying face must be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the completion of each day. J. Sweep off excess sand when the job is complete. K. The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 in. (10 mm) under a 10 ft. (3 m) long straightedge. L. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. M. The resanding as necessary of paver joints shall be accomplished by contractor for a period of 90 days after completion of work. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After removal of excess sand, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings. END OF SECTION 02518 SECTION 02520 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including curbs, gutter, walkways, and pavement. B. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. C. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. D. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Traffic control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 1. Coordinate with requirements for "temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: 1. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 – Page 2 of 5 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx B. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surfaces of concrete. C. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain, cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. D. Reinforcing bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, Internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. G. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as required. H. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. I. Anti-spalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying with AASHTO M- 233. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders. b. "Spartan-Cote"; The Burke Co. c. "Kure-n-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech. d. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill. J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type,” "Grade,” and "Class" to suit project requirements. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following. a. "Epoxtite"; A.C. Horn. b. "Patch and Bond Epoxy"; The Burke Co. c. "Sure-Poxy"; Kaufman Products Inc. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as herein specified. B. Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining admixture, and water to produce the following properties: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 – Page 3 of 5 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum at 28 days unless otherwise indicated. 2. Slump Limit: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer); 3 inches for other concrete 3. Air content: 5 to 8 percent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required ensuring separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless otherwise indicated. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assembles, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing dowels, and joint devices. D. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 – Page 4 of 5 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than ½ hour, place a construction joint. F. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. G. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic matching may be used for curb and gutter placement at Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: 1. Construct expansion, weakened-plane concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 2. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: 1. Provide Weakened-Plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: a. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooming top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a joiner. C. Construction Joints: 1. Place construction Joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than ½ hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. 2. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-section forms. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locate expansion joints at 50 feet o.c. for each pavement lane unless otherwise indicated. E. Extend Joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than ½ inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. F. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip Joint filler sections together. G. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. H. Fillers and Sealants: comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for preparation of joints, materials, installation, and performance. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 – Page 5 of 5 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 – Page 6 of 5 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smoother finish. C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: 1. Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to Architect. E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. 3.07 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods. 3.08 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill text cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, disco before final inspection. END OF SECTION 02520 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02577 PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: Provide pavement marking in the types and arrangements shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: Within 60 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Photographs, scale drawings, or other data acceptable to the Architect, showing types of graphics proposed to be used. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01640. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. Provide paint specifically formulated for use as pavement marking in automobile traffic areas, and in the colors selected by the Architect from standard colors of the approved manufacturer. B. Acceptable products: 1. "Traffic Paint" manufactured by J. E. Bauer Company. 2. "Traffic Paint" manufactured by Tnemec. 3. "Romark Traffic" manufactured by Glidden-Durkee. 4. "Traffic and Zone Marking Paint" manufactured by PPG. PAVEMENT MARKING 02577 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PAVEMENT MARKING 02577 – Page 2 of 2 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of thi's Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Secure the Architect's approval of graphics design and layout prior to start of application. B. Using proper masking, stencils, and application equipment recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved paint, apply the approved paint in strict accordance with its manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Provide traffic cones, barricades, and other devices needed to protect the paint until it is sufficiently dry to withstand traffic. 3.04 CLEANUP A. When paint is thoroughly dry, visually inspect the entire application, and: 1. Touchup as required to provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout. 2. Using a permanently opaque paint identical in color to the surface on which the paint was applied, block out and eliminate all traces fo splashed, tracked, and/or spilled pavement marking paint from the background surfaces. END OF SECTION 02577 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide an underground irrigation system as shown and specified. The work includes: 1. Automatic/manual irrigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, and accessories. 2. Valves, backflow preventer, and fittings. 3. Controller, control wire and mounting accessories. 4. Testing 5. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work. 6. Associated plumbing and accessories to complete the system. 7. Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. lnstaller’s Qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigation systems of comparable size. 2. Must be Texas State Licensed Irrigator. 1.03 MATERIAL AND METHODS: A. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes and standards: 1. Uniform Plumbing Code,(UPC)published by the Western Plumbing Officials’ Assoc. 2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electric code. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF). 5. The Irrigation Association, (IA). 1.04 REFERENCS American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D2239 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series) ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cement for poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: As-Built Drawings: Furnish two sets, noting exact locations of elements and changes to Construction Drawings. Operation Manual: Furnish two copies, bound in 1 inch diameter three ring binders, indexed and tabbed shall include following: e. Approved submittals as specified herein. f. Installation instructions including mounting details for control valves. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 1 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx g. Operating Instructions: 1) Winterization procedures 2) Recommended operation sequence, frequency, and length of operation cycle, as per relationship to estimated absorption rate, evaporation rate, a h. Maintenance Instructions: 1) Manufacturers' product data, installation, and maintenance instructions. 2) Copies of completed warranty information. Contractor to complete and mail necessary warranty registration information to manufacturer keeping copies for B. Controller Chart: Prepare color coded chart, reduced in size, containing same plan information as As-Built drawings, and laminated in plastic on both sides, with following specific information: 1. Note routing of control wires. 2. Identify valves as to size, station number shown on controller, and type of irrigation head (e.g. spray head, turf head) on each valve. 3. Delineate each station's limits of coverage by color-coding, with each station having different color showing its zone with zone number designation. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. B. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads, and similar components that cannot be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Call proper authorities to locate all underground utilities. B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of the final landscape work. C. Promptly notify the Landscape Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions. D. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads, valves, and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at time of installation and approved by the Landscape Architect. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Guarantee installation for 1 year from date of final acceptance for the following: 1. Defects in material, equipment, and workmanship. 2. Repair of damage to premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment, and workmanship to satisfaction of Owner. B. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly at no cost to Owner. C. Parts Manufacturers’ warranties shall be provided to Owner. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Visit site once each month for first 6 months of operation following Final Acceptance. Provide on- site consultation with Owner's operating personnel. Allow up to 4 hours for each visit. B. Maintenance Agreement: 1. Prior to beginning installation, execute bonded, written Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement with Owner for period of 2 years from date of Final Acceptance for the following: IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 2 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx a. Spring start-up of system in accordance with Section 02900. b. Monthly checks of system during operating season. c. Winterization of system in accordance with Section 02900. 2. Costs for additional work required for repair of items not covered by warranty (e.g. damage by others) shall be negotiated between Owner and Contractor prior to initiation of any repairs. 3. Costs for Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement are over and above Contract Sum, and shall not be included in construction price. Payment for extended maintenance by Owner shall occur upon completion of scheduled service and additional work, if any, as it occurs on monthly basis throughout duration of Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement. PART 2 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers shall include: Rain Bird Sales, Inc. - Turf Division The Toro Company - Irrigation Division L.R. Nelson Corporation - Turf Division PIPE A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe over 1 inch diameter shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 21, and Class 200. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe 1 inch diameter and under shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 13.5, and Class 315. C. Flexible Polyethylene (PE): Pipe shall conform to ASTM D2239, SDR 11.5, PE23, rated at 100 PSI, National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Subject to approval of Owner, PE shall be used for laterals in areas where ground is subject to freezing for extended periods of time each year. D. Joints: 1. Pipe sizes 2 1/2 inch or smaller shall have bell and socket joints. E. Pipe sizes larger than 2 1/2 inch shall have snap connections with rubber gasket joints. Thrust blocking shall be required in accordance with Section 02510. F. Fittings: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40, and Molded. 2. Flexible Polyethylene (PE) Lateral Line Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2609, Type 1 PVC insert fittings designed for used with this type of pipe. Pipe and fittings shall be joined with stainless steel pinch clamps or worm gear clamps, including stainless steel screw. G. Risers above finished grade shall be black in color or receive 2 coats of black exterior semi-gloss enamel paint if a color other than black. ACCESSORIES A. Sleeves: Sleeves for pipes passing beneath paving shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40. Minimum diameter of 2 inch or 2 sizes larger than pipe scheduled to pass through them. B. PVC Solvent Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM D2564. C. Swing Joint Connections: Connections between heads and laterals shall be thick wall, flexible, polyethylene pipe, with fittings that have male barbs on one end and either male or female screw ends opposite. Glue fittings and female barb adapters are not allowed. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 3 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CUTOFF OR ISOLATION VALVES A. 3 Inches or Smaller: Ball valves as manufactured by Red-White Valve Corporation, Carson, CA. B. Larger than 3 inches: Cast iron and bronze mechanical joint valves, fusion bonded epoxy coated exterior and interior, Resilient Wedge Valve as manufactured by Clow Valve Co., Oskaloosa, IA. 3. Provide a valve key and cast iron cylindrical valve box with top with each valve. QUICK COUPLER VALVES A. Provide be one of following: 1. Rain Bird model 44NP Valve with model 33K Key 2. Toro 470 Series Valve and Coupler Key 3. Nelson Model 7643 Valve with Model 7640 Coupler Key and Model 8649 Locking Top Wrench. B. Provide each valve with key having 3/4 inch male top pipe threads for hose connection. ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES A. Provide one of the following: 1. Rain Bird PEB Series electric remote control valves 2. Toro 252 Series plastic valves 3. Nelson Model 7900 Series plastic valves B. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with sealant for wiring connections. MASTER VALVES A. Master valves shall be electric control valve as specified herein. B. Size of valve shall be same as diameter of main line pipe as noted on the drawings. C. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with sealant for wiring connections. SPRINKLER HEADS A. Full or Part Circle Pop-Up Fixed Spray Sprinkler: 1. Acceptable Products: a. Rain Bird 1800 Series nozzles with 1800 Series sprinklers having Pressure Regulating (PRS) and Seal-A-Matic (SAM) features. b. Toro 570 Series plastic nozzles with 570C Series sprinklers having Pressure Compensating Devices (PCD) and optional check valve unit. c. Nelson 6400 Series with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV) with Pressure Compensating Screens (PCS). 2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, pop-up heights shall be: a. Turf - 4 inches b. Shrub and groundcover beds - 12 inches B. Full or Part Circle Pop-up Gear Driven Rotor Sprinkler. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Rain Bird Turf Bird Rotor Pop-up Sprinkler Series, R-50C Commercial Series, R-70 Series, with Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve. b. Toro Super 700 Sprinklers Series S700C Commercial, with check valve. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 4 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx c. Nelson Pro 6000 and 6500 Series Gear Drives with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV). d. VALVE BOX A. Valve boxes shall be manufactured by Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan WI. No irrigation valve box shall be placed in pavement areas unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1. When used with single valve, provide Economy Turf Box with green colored snap fit cover labeled "Valve Box". 2. When used with 2 or more valves, provide Jumbo Box with 20 inch x 14 inch cover opening with cover labeled "Control Valve". AUTOMATIC LOW POINT DRAIN VALVES A. Automatic drain valves shall be Rain Bird Model Number 16A, FDV, or equal by acceptable manufacturers specified above. AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Controller shall have wall mount, weatherproof, lockable cabinet with internal transformer. Acceptable products include: 1. Rain Bird RC-4C, RC-7C, RC-1260C. 2. Toro Vision II Plus Series Controller 3. Nelson 8900 Series Controller CONTROL WIRE A. Number 14-size minimum copper wire, U. L. approved for underground direct burial. 1. Colored wire shall have same color-coding as shown on controller. 2. Provide single wire from controller to each valve. 3. Provide common neutral from controller to each valve. BACKFLOW PREVENTOR A. Comply with requirements and codes of local governing authority regarding backflow prevention. B. Provide the necessary materials, insulation/draining capabilities, and insulated fiberglass enclosure, dark green in color. C. Backflow preventors shall be type suitable for use in high hazard cross connection to potable water system as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company, Lawrence, Ma. 1. Reduced pressure backflow preventors shall be No. 909 series Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventor. 2. Double check valve assembly backflow preventors shall be No. 709 series Double Check Valve Assembly. 3. In absence of local codes or requirements, provide double check assembly backflow preventor installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. RAINFALL SENSOR A. Provide rainfall sensor to cancel operation of controller during substantial rainfall. Acceptable products include: 1. Mini-Click Rain Sensor manufactured by Glen-Hilton IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 5 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2. Equivalent as manufactured by Rain Bird, Toro, or Nelson. METER A. Meter box shall conform to requirements of local utility company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Pressure/Flow Test: Conduct tests at the irrigation water tap or meter location and provide written re-sults to Owner including the following information: 1. Static pressure in psi 2. Residual pressure in psi 3. Flow in gpm B. Prior to installation, receive approval from General Contractor to proceed with construction. C. Contractor shall field verify all aboveground and underground utilities prior to start of work. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Trenching and Backfilling: 1. Trenching and backfilling shall conform to Section 02300. 2. Excavate trench to proper depth as shown or specified. 3. Minimum trench width shall be 3 1/2 inches. 4. Overexcavate trenches deeper than required in soils containing rock or other hard material that might damage pipe and backfill to proper depth with selected fine earth or sand. 5. Backfill and hand tamp overexcavation prior to installing piping. 6. Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. 7. Sprinkler piping shall not be installed in same trench as heating duct, electric ducts, storm and sanitary sewer lines, water and gas mains. B. Do not cut sidewalks, paved areas, or curb and gutter when trenching for piping unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 1. Provide sleeves as specified in Part 2 above under paving prior to installation of paving. 2. Auger, bore, or tunnel under existing paving without disturbing pavement. Damaged pavement shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 02740 or 02751. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Minimum cover from top of piping to finished grade shall be provided as follows: 1. Lawn and planting areas: a. Mains and Control Valves: 18 inches b. Laterals: 12 inches 2. Drives or parking areas: 24 inches B. Clearances: Maintain 3 inch minimum horizontal clearance between parallel lines in same trench or vertical clearance between lines crossing at angles. C. Special Requirements - PVC and PE pipe: 1. Snake pipe in trench at least 1 foot per 100 feet of pipe to allow for thermal expansion. 2. Pipe laterals shall be laid to drain to low point drains located at lowest elevations of each zone. D. Rest full length of pipe section on bed of trench, excavating recesses to accommodate joints. Do not lay pipe on unstable material or blocking, or when in opinion of Owner conditions are unsuitable. E. Threaded Plastic Pipe Jointing: IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 6 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. 2. Wrap joints with Teflon tape or use virgin Teflon lubricant. F. Bell and Socket Plastic Pipe Jointing: Cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 3.4 SLEEVING A. Provide sleeves for both piping and control wiring where either passes under paved surfaces. 1. Depths of sleeves shall be same as that required for piping at each location or condition. 2. Extend sleeves 12 inches beyond paving at each end. 3. Install permanent benchmark at top of curbs for reference to sleeve locations. 3.5 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES A. Provide automatic low point drains on all zones. Provide two valves at lowest points of each zone, with each drain installed above a 12 inch x 12 inch x 12 inch deep area of coarse gravel. 3.6 VALVES A. Do not locate beneath paved surfaces. B. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch. C. Locate within valve box with 6 inch deep layer of coarse gravel beneath bottom of valve. D. Top of quick coupler valves shall be 6 inches to top of valve box. Top of gravel layer shall be 3 inches below top of valve. E. Master Valve (if required on the Drawings): 1. Locate immediately behind backflow preventor. 2. Valve shall be energized by master valve circuit on automatic controller. 3.7 SPRINKLERS A. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch with top collar, not nozzle, flush with finish grade. B. Provide swing joint with each sprinkler except where entire head is raised above grade and/or where rigid riser piping is required. C. Heads adjacent to paving and curb: Locate between 6 and 12 inches from edge of paving or back of curb to prevent car overhang to conflict with a fully extended sprinkler. 3.8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRE A. Conform to the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes. B. Provide electrical connection to system as designated on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Wire Placement: 1. Do not run control and power supply wiring in same conduit. 2. Provide continuous runs of wire between controller and valves. Splices shall be made with one of following: a. Watertight below ground electrical junction boxes. b. Water-tight connectors, such as utilized for valves, and located within valve box for ease of locating. c. The location of electrical splices shall be shown on the As-Built drawings. 3. Bury control wire beside pipe in same trench. Bundle and tape together at not more than 10 ft in-tervals. D. Expansion Loops: Construct by wrapping wire around 1/2 inch diameter pipe to create coil. A 3 foot section of wire shall be used to create 12 inch coil with 6 foot section being used to create 24 inch coil. 1. Provide 12 inch coils at each wire splice, not including valves, and at each change of wire direc-tion. 2. Provide 24 inch coils at each control valve and where each valve enters conduit for IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 7 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 – Page 8 of 8 automatic controller. 3.9 BACKFILLING A. Sand or fine-grained soils shall be used for initial backfill to sufficient depth to prevent damage to pipe from rocks or other debris during compaction of subsequent backfill. B. Fill trench to within 3 inches of finish grade with excavated soil and compact in accordance with Section 02300. C. Fill top 3 inches with existing topsoil in planting or turf areas and wheel roll until compaction of backfill is same as surrounding soil. D. Grade backfilled trench uniform with surrounding grades. 3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR A. Comply with local codes for installation of backflow preventor. In absence of local codes, install in ac-cordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide combination of drains and quick coupler valves to accommodate winterization of entire system by forced air. Submit materials and methods to Owner for consideration and receive approval prior to installation of work. 3.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Location and installation shall be as shown on the Drawings and approved by Owner prior to installa-tion. B. Provide rigid conduits for both power supply and control wiring. 1. Control wire conduit shall extend to 18 inches below grade. 2. Secure conduit to wall with anchors and screws. C. Provide electrical grounding for controller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and Adjustments: Following installation, make final adjustments to lawn irrigation system prior to Owner's final inspection. 1. Flush system completely, with nozzles and screens removed, to extract debris. 2. Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw. Correct as necessary. 3. Check pop-up spray nozzling for proper arc of spray with no overthrow onto pavement. Adjust nozzles as necessary for proper throw. 4. Insure uniform distribution exists. 5. Insure proper sprinkler head operational after landscaping and/or sod installation. B. Demonstration: Following final adjustment, operate entire installation to demonstrate complete and successful operation of equipment. END OF SECTION 02810 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. D. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, 4 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Provide fillet strips on external corners of beams, joists, and columns. G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from moisture or crushing. H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Owner's Representative before proceeding. CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 – Page 2 of 2 3.03 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. 3.04 FORM CLEANING A. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.05 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.07 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. END OF SECTION 03100 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI (DA4). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. END OF SECTION CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 – Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls. D. Concrete reinforcement. E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes. G. Concrete curing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide smooth, stain-free final appearance. 2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with application of coatings. 3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating, and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. 1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. 2.05 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Rubber type, COE CRD-C 513. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick; tongue and groove profile. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 – Page 1 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Owner's Representative for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, per ASTM C 39 at 28 days:in accordance with drawings. 2. Total Air Content: 4 to 6 percent, per ASTM C 173. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 2.07 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with epoxy grout. D. Install 6 mil. vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings. 3.02 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. D. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. E. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. F. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. H. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. I. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. J. Do not add water to concrete mix. 3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 – Page 2 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 – Page 3 of 3 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. B. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer. 3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner's Representative. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 04065 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. B. Grout for masonry. 1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature in compliance with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW)(HW). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270 1. Exterior, load bearing masonry: Type S. 2. Interior, load bearing masonry: Type S. 3. Interior, non-load bearing masonry: Type N. B. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percent of Portland cement by weight. C. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type N, using gray color cement. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type N. E. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, non-hydraulic type. F. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. G. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstrated stability and colorfastness. 1. Colors: As required to match Owner's Representative's color samples. 2. Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. H. Water: Clean and potable. I. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. J. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. K. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 2.02 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 2.03 GROUT MIXES A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94. 1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04065 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04065 – Page 2 of 2 B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94. 1. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 2.04 GROUT MIXING A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM standards. B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet grout pressure. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of Section 04811. B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 3.03 GROUTING A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations of contract documents. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 04811 SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete masonry units. B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90. a. Hollow block, as indicated on drawings. b. Exposed faces: Special color and texture where indicated on drawings. 3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129. a. Hollow block, as indicated as indicated on drawings. 4. Face Brick 2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Manufacturers: a. AA Wire Products, L.L.C. b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2.03 FLASHINGS A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 10 mil thick. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items ( for example the early bird key drop box) are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04811 – Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04811 – Page 2 of 2 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.06 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. B. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 3.07 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.09 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts. B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. C. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Connections not detailed. Connections shall be prepared under the seal of a licensed structural engineer registered in the state of project construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC M016. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36/A 36M, or ASTM A992 GR50 as indicated on drawings. B. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A. C. Steel Plate: ASTM A 514/A 514M. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Finish black. E. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A 108 Grade -. F. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, plain. H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C. I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. J. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107 and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. C. Develop required camber for members. 2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP paint system guide no. 7.00. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 2.04 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC S303. B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC S329. D. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx COLD FORMED METAL STEEL 05400 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI SG- 673. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Galvanized finish in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M: G90/Z275. B. Joist and Headers: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel shape with unpunched web; U- shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx WOOD, METAL, AND PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS 05400 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06067 WOOD, METAL, AND PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plastic Laminate Surfacing Materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Selection Samples: Submit actual samples of surfacing materials to illustrate full range of colors, patterns, and finishes available. B. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product; include recommendations for substrate types, adhesive types, and fabrication techniques using specified products. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products of this section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to prevent breakage and marring of surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Pionite Decorative Laminates Auborn,ME 04211- 1014 customer response line 1-800-PIONITE B. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Formica Corporation; Cincinnati OH 45241; customer response line 1-800-FORMICA. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE SURFACING MATERIALS A. Standard Plastic Laminate: Formica Plastic Laminates: Sheet material constructed of decorative surface papers, impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat and minimum 750 psi pressure to kraft papers impregnated with phenolic thermosetting condensation resins; of the following types: 1. For Countertops and Other Horizontal Wearing Surfaces: General Purpose Horizontal Type: Formica Grade 51, Nominal sheet thickness 0.050 inch, meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard HGS. 2. For Vertical Flat and Formed Surfaces Exposed to View: General Purpose Vertical Post Forming Type: Formica Grade 30/31, Nominal sheet thickness 0.039 inch, meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard VGP. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx WOOD, METAL, AND PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS 05400 – Page 2 of 2 B. Backing Sheet: 1. Formica Grade 89, Nominal sheet thickness 0.050 inch, meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard BGF. 2. Color: white. C. Cabinet Exterior including Doors: Formica Grade 72, Nominal sheet thickness 0.020 inch, meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard CLS. 1. Color: Pionite Folkstone Gray (SG241 Suede). D. Cabinet Liner: Formica Grade 72, Nominal sheet thickness 0.020 inch, meeting performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard CLS. 1. Color: Pionite Bankers Gray (SG214 Suede). E. Adhesives for Installation of Materials: As specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Precondition surfacing materials and surfaces to receive surfacing materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation of sheet materials is specified in Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. B. Install cast products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural wall framing. B. Wall sheathing. C. Preservative treatment of wood. D. Wood nailers, curbs, and cant strips for roofing and items installed on roof. E. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, and wood trim. F. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS Design structural site fabricated trusses under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of such trusses and licensed in state of project construction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6 ): 1. Grade: No. 2. E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 through 4 x 16 ): 1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows: a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 1350 psi. b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 1,300,000 psi. F. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS Miscellaneous Panels: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. 2.03 ACCESSORIES Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative to Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 – Page 2 of 2 0.25 percent retention. 1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA WCD 1. E. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. B. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06193 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06193 PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated wood trusses for roof. This includes truss to girder connectors as required. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following under provisions of section 01340 1. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s installation instructions. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, connecting plates, and framed openings. 3. Certification: Submit design calculations, which will include all truss to girder connectors. Design calculations to be sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer. 4. Truss manufacturer to provide a certification letter stating that the fire retardant trusses will maintain their structural integrity after the fire treating process. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of prefabricated wood trusses, with three- year minimum experience. B. Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in structural framing design of trusses, licensed in state where Project is located. Comply with the “National Design for Stress Graded Lumber and its fastenings”, as published by NFPA. And “Design Specifications for Light Metal Place Connected Wood Trusses”, as published by TPI. C. Refer to drawings and government codes for live and dead load requirements. D. Lumber grading agency: Certified by ALSC. E. Truss Plates: I accordance with Truss Plate Institute. F. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other government load criteria. 2. Conform to applicable code for fir retardant requirements. 3. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Member of TPI and having minimum experience level indicated. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. B. Plywood Gussets: Graded by APA; fir wood species, lumber core, standard grade, waterproof glue; 19 percent maximum moisture content. C. Steel Connectors: ANSI/ASTM A446 steel, Grade A; galvanized; die stamped with integral teeth D. Fasteners: galvanized; size and type to suit condition E. Bearing Plate Anchors: Bolts or ballistic fasteners for anchorages to steel. F. All wood trusses to be fire retardant. (Re: Section 06100) G. Wood blocking: Softwood lumber, fir species, construction grade, maximum moisture content of 19 percent. All wood blocking is to be fire treated (Re: Section 06100) Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06193 – Page 2 of 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Place trusses true to line and level. B. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. C. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position before inducing loads. D. Do not field cut trusses. E. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. 3.2 TOLERANCES 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Framing Members: ½ inch maximum from true position. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished surfaces. E. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard; American Hardboard Association. B. ANSI A208.1 - Wood Particle board. C. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). E. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact; Federal Specifications and Standards. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality. B. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL MATERIALS A. Wood Particle board: NIST PS 1; AWI P-200 standard, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 – Page 2 of 3 2.02 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE A. Pionite B. Formica C. Nevemar D. Wilsonart E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: AWI P-200, 0.040 inch [1 mm] Post Forming quality; pattern, and gloss surface texture as selected by architect. B. Cabinet Exterior including Doors Color: Pionite Folkstone Gray (SG241 Suede). C. Cabinet Liner Color: Pionite Bankers Gray (SG214 Suede). 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. E. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Cabinet door hardware: Provide hinges (Stanley concealed casework hinges 1501- 9x self closing nickel finish), catches (Stanley magnetic catch no. 326) and pulls (Stanley cabinet pulls 4483 satin finish aluminum) of types indicated, to accommodate each door size and style. 2. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide sets of type indicated, including pulls to accommodate each pair of sliding doors. Provide sliding type sets, except where rolling types are indicated. 3. Drawer Hardware: Provide slides and pulls of types indicated, to accommodate each drawer size and style. Equip each drawer with side-mounted, full-extension, ball- bearing, nylon roller drawer slides with load capacity of 75 lbs. per pair. 4. Locks: Provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed individually. Provide on-half of all doors and drawers with locks, final location of locks shall be approved by the Architect. 5. Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as “adjustable”, provide recessed mounted slotted-type standards and brackets of needed to support shelves with uniform 40 lb. per sq. ft loading. 6. Exposed Hardware Finish: Except where noted otherwise, provide exposed hardware with BHMA satin stainless steel finish. F. Grommets: Plastic material for cut-outs. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style. D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel edges. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 – Page 3 of 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough4n associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work. B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PENETRATING SEALER - PRIMER 07191 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 07191 PENETRATING SEALER-PRIMER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-pigmented sealer-primer for horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall comply with federal, state, and local volatile organic compounds (VOC) regulations. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply sealer-primers to surfaces below 50 degrees F or above 95 degrees F unless recommended by the manufacturer. B. Do not apply sealer-primer when rain is predicted within 24 hours after surface has been wet. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER & MATERIAL A. Sealer-Primer: CURECRETE Waterproofing Sealer (Ashford Formula). B. No substitutions permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Apply sealer-primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for indicated project conditions; for multi-coat application. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 07210 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 07210 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, and exterior wall behind gypsum board wall finish and exterior wall.. B. Batt insulation in exterior roof construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded expanded polystyrene board with cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 2. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F (-3.9 degrees C.) 5. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. 6. Board Density: 0.5 lb/cu ft. 7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 8. Flame/Smoke Properties: in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co. b. UC Industries. c. Or Equal. 2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: R13 or R19, as indicated on drawings. 2. Thickness: 3 1/2 inch or 6 inch, as indicated on drawings. 3. Facing: Foil-reinforced-kraft vapor retarder 4. Flame/Smoke Properties: in accordance with ASTM E 84. 5. Manufacturers: a. Certain-Teed Products Corp. b. Manville Building Materials Corp. c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. c. Or Equal. B. Air Baffles: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Perimeter Insulation: Extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive application, 1/2 inch thick protection board. B. Wood Framed Roof Insulation: fiberglass batts with integral vapor retarder, stapled to wood trusses. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION 07211 – Page 1 of 5 SECTION 07211 HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers loose fill insulation, vapor barrier and all necessary blocking to install insulation over ceilings and in attic spaces where shown. B. Insulation shall be installed in sufficient thickness to provide thermal resistance "R" valves of "R" 25 above ceilings and "R" 25 in attics. C. Provide glass fiber insulation for loose fill applications in horizontal cavities. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWING. B. Samples: 1. Loose fill insulation in pint size containers 2. Blocking: 150 mm (6-inch) long strips 3. Vapor Retarder: 150 mm x 150 mm (6-inch by 6-inch) pieces In areas of high humidity C. Manufacture's Literature: 1. Submit current copies of the insulation manufacturer's printed fact sheet literature, including descriptive data, insulation characteristics, and instructions for installation and protection of insulation. 2. Submit copy of "Bag Label". 1.3 DELIVERY A. Deliver materials to the site in the original sealed containers or packages bearing the manufacturer's name and brand designation. B. The containers or packages of insulation shall bear the referenced specification number, type and class as applicable, recommended method of installation (pneumatic or pouring), minimum net weight of insulation, coverage charts, "R" values, and required warning statements. 1.4 STORAGE A. Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and unload and store with a minimum of handling. B. Storage spaces shall be dry locations, not subject to open flames or sparks, and permitting easy access for inspection and handling. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION 07211 – Page 2 of 5 B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C764…………………………. Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation C687 ………………………… Determination of the Thermal Resistance of Low-Density Fibrous Loose-Fill Type Building Insulation C518 …………………………..Standard Test Method for steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of the heat Flow Meter E136 …………………………..Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750° Celsius E970………………………….. Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Exposed Attic Floor Insulation Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source C553……………………………Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation C612-00………………………..Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation C728-97…………………………Perlite Thermal Insulation C739-00…………………………Cellulosic Fiber (Wood-Base) Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation C764-99…………………………. Mineral Fiber Loose Fill Thermal Insulation. C1015-99 ................................... Installation of Cellulosic and Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation D4397-96 ................................... Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agriculture Application E84-00 ........................................ Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials C. Federal Regulations: Code of Federal Regulations 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). D. National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA): 211-00 ........................................ Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LOOSE FILL INSULATION A. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. B. Certain Teed 2.02 MATERIAL A. PRO-WHITE III PREMIUM FIBERGLASS LOOSE FILL a. Complies with Type 1, Category I ASTM C764, ASTM C518, ASTM C687, ASTM E136, ASTM E970, ASTM C553 B. SYSTEM 5™ FIBER GLASS BLOWING INSULATION a. Nonflammable and Noncombustible. Loose Fill Insulation meets Federal Specification HHI-1030B testing criteria for smoldering combustion and ASTM #136 for non-combustion. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION 07211 – Page 3 of 5 C. Surface Burning Characteristics a. Maximum Flame Spread: 25 b. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 2.2 BLOCKING A. Wood, metal, mineral fiber or perlite boards or other materials approved by the project Architect B. Mineral Fiber Board: ASTM C612, Type IB. C. Perlite Board: ASTM C728. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDER A. Six mil thick polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D4397. B. Self adhesive tape having a perm rating equal to the polyethylene. 2.4 RECOVERED MATERIAL A. Insulation products shall comply with following minimum content standards for recovered materials: Material Type Percent by Weight Cellulose Loose-fill and spray-on 75 percent post-consumer recovered paper Perlite composite board 23 percent post-consumer Rock wool material 75 percent recovered material B. The minimum-content standards are based on the weight (not the volume) of the material in the insulating core only. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Where possible, inspect attic(s) and above ceiling(s) to receive insulation for conditions which will adversely affect the execution of the work or create a safety hazard. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the project Architect. B. Do not install insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Follow ASTM C1015. The inspection shall include checking for the following: 1. Defects in electrical fixtures, equipment, wiring, junction boxes, receptacles, and switches that will cause hazards. 2. Openings through which the loose fill insulation material may escape. 3. Air ducts which appear to have joints that are not securely or sealed. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prior to the installation of insulation, provide blocking as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C1015. B. Install blocking around attic trap door(s), ceiling access-panel(s), and vents if the level to which the unsettled insulation will be installed exceeds their height. Cover openings into the attic with Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION 07211 – Page 4 of 5 temporary blocking to prevent insulation from falling into the opening, including spaces enclosed by blockings. 3.3 INSPECTION Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been tested 3.4 MATERIAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION Protect insulation from becoming wet. 3.5 EXECUTION A Blow Loose Fill into cavities using a layering motion from side to side. Use attic rulers throughout the attic to verify that insulation is being installed at the proper thickness to ensure desired R value. B When installing wear proper clothing, long-sleeved shirts loose at the neck and wrist, long pants, gloves and cap. Wear eye protection (safety goggles, safety glasses or a face shield or a combination of these, as appropriate). Use a NIOSH/MSHA approved disposable dust respirator, such as a 3M model #8710 or #9900 or equivalent. C. Install blocking around heat producing devices with minimum clearances as specified herein. 1. Install blocking 50 mm (two inches) above the height of the finished insulation installation and in a manner that ensures that devices which may require maintenance or servicing remain accessible after the insulation is installed. 2. Minimum clearances for blocking around heat producing devices shall be as follows: a. Masonry chimneys for equipment and incinerator(s) operating at a temperature of not more than (1500 degrees F): 100 mm (Four inches) from the outside face of the masonry. b. Vents, chimney and vent connectors, and chimneys other than masonry chimneys: Minimum clearances as required by NFPA 211. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Retarder: 1. Where space is accessible, install vapor retarder below insulation. Do not install a vapor retarder over existing insulation or where there is a vapor retarder under existing insulation. 2. Take care to prevent tears, breaks, or ruptures of any kind which might interfere with the effectiveness of the vapor retarder, and install in a manner which will assure a continuous seal. 3. Lap joints or breaks in vapor retarder in a manner that will assure a vapor retarder capable of effectively controlling moisture transmission. Tape laps to retain vapor barrier in place. 4. Use self adhesive tape for laps and for sealing breaks and holes in the vapor retarder. B. Insulation: 1. Install insulation in accordance with ASTM C1015 and the requirements specified. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx HORIZONTAL CAVITY LOOSE FILL INSULATION 07211 – Page 5 of 5 2. Do not install insulation until the requirements specified in the INSPECTION and PREPARATION paragraphs have been carried out and any defects which were identified have been corrected and their cause eliminated. 3. Pneumatic installation of thermal insulation shall comply with OSHA. Supply and utilize the personnel protective equipment and engineering controls necessary for a safe effective installation. Use only pneumatic equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 4. Install the insulation allowing it to settle to its natural density. Do not tamp or rod the insulation. 5. Install insulation in sufficient depth to provide the thermal value specified after settlement of the insulation. To obtain a minimum "R" value of 25 or as shown, using the number of bags per 90 m² (1000 squares feet) as shown on the manufacturer's "Bag Label". 6. For pneumatic installations, use the least air pressure meeting the manufacturer's instructions. 7. Do not blow the insulation into electrical devices and vents which open into the attic and other spaces to be insulated. 8. Fit the attic side of trap doors and access panels with perlite or mineral fiber insulation boards. Insulate the attic side of trap doors unless prevented by a retractable ladder. C. Post Installation Procedures: 1. In accordance with ASTM C1015. 2. Remove temporary blockings over vent openings in attic(s). END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx BOARD INSULATION 07212 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 07212 BOARD INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs, and exterior wall behind gypsum board wall finish and exterior wall.. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded expanded polystyrene board with cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 2. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F (-3.9 degrees C.) 5. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. 6. Board Density: 0.5 lb/cu ft. 7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 8. Flame/Smoke Properties: in accordance with ASTM E 84. 9. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co. d. UC Industries. e. Or Equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION B. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Perimeter Insulation: Extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive application, 1/2 inch thick protection board. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FOAMED IN-PLACE INSULATION 07214 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 07214 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Foamed-in-place insulation in masonry cavity walls. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with minimum 5 years of experience and approved by the manufacturer. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tripolymer manufactured by C.P. Chemical Co., Inc. B. Core-Fill-500 manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. C. Thermco Foam with T-17 manufactured by Thermal Corporation. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Insulation: FHSA Non-toxic type. 1. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C 177; a. 0.219 k value at 75 degrees F. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96; 15.5 - 16.9 perms. 3. Density: ASTM D 1622; .8 - 1.3 lb/cu ft. 4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 5 / 0. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application. 3.02 APPLICATION Apply insulation in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS 07270 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame, heat, and smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction. B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke partitions. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Expansion and seismic joint firestopping: Section 05810, EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES. B. Spray applied fireproofing: Section 07253, SPRAYED ON FIREPROOFING (Mineral Fiber). C. Sealants and application: Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING. D. Fire and smoke damper assemblies in ductwork: Section 15840, DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and smoke stopping used. C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed. D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM, UL, or WH proposed for use. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and product identification. B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. 1.5 GUARANTEE Firestopping work subject to the terms of the Article GUARANTY of Section GENERAL CONDITIONS, except extend the guaranty period to five years. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE FM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable. A. PUBLICATIONS LISTED BELOW FORM A PART OF THIS SPECIFICATION TO THE EXTENT REFERENCED. PUBLICATIONS ARE REFERENCED IN THE TEXT BY THE BASIC DESIGNATION ONLY. 1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84-01 ........................................ Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials E814-02 ...................................... Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops C. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM): Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS 07270 – Page 2 of 3 Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Annual Issue Building Materials Directory Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory 1479-00 ...................................... Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops E. Warnock Hersey (WH): Annual Issue Certification Listings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke. B. Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) nominal pipe or 0.01 m2 (16 sq. in.) in overall cross sectional area. C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier. D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties: 1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents. 2. Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of products. 3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure. 4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties: 1. Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used. 2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal. 3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant. F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814. H. Materials to be asbestos free. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS 07270 – Page 3 of 3 2.2 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in section SEALANTS AND CAULKING. B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant. C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with E84. D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on site examination of areas to receive firestopping. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence and bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials. B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side of the fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the firestopping materials are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the proposed firestopping systems have been submitted and approved. B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or other approved system details and installation instructions. C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions. 3.4 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris. B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until completed work is inspected and accepted by the project Architect C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials. - - - E N D - - Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING 07310 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07310 ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. The roof system shall consist of asphalt shingles for steep roofs, gutter pan, downspouts and prefinished flashings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and methods shall be in accordance with the printed instructions and specifications of the Roofing Manufacture and the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Recommendations. B. The roofing installer shall be certified by the Roofing Manufacturer and have a minimum 3 years Installation experience and provide evidence of same upon request. C. The Roofing Contractor shall arrange with a field representative of the Roofing Manufacture and Owner for a pre-construction meeting prior to the start of Roof Work. This meeting shall be for the purpose of reviewing the manufacturer’s requirements, specifications, details, materials and methods of installation for Roof Work. 5. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer’s Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for roofing materials. 2. Roofing Contractor’s Guarantee: Three (3) signed copies. 3. Samples: Pieces of sheet metal flashing. 4. Shop Drawings: Submit two (2) sets of prints and one (1) set of sepias to owner for approval of all fabricated items prior to fabrication. The Contractor will be responsible for all details, dimensions and the correct fit of all work. Do not fabricate work until owner has approved the drawings. 6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers identified to show name, brand, type, grade, and UL label. Store, protect and keep materials dry until roofing is completely installed. 7. PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during roofing operations. 8. ROOFING GUARANTEE: A. The installed roofing system shall meet the following: 1. Be full-replacement manufacturer’s warranty for a period of five (5) years minimum for material and labor. 2. The warranty shall be without exclusions, deductions or limits. 9. MATERIALS: A. Asphalt Shingles: Square-Tab Fiberglass Strip Shingles: Mineral-Surfaced, self-sealing, 3-tab, fiberglass-based, strip asphalt shingles, complying with ASTM D 3018, Type 1, and with the following requirements: 1. Wind Resistance: Passes the wind-resistance-test requirements of ASTM D 3161. 2. Fire-Test-Response Classification: Class C. 3. Colors, Blends and Patterns: See drawings. Provide Owner selection from manufacturer’s full range of colors, textures and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. B. Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-precut units to match asphalt shingles. C. Ridge Vent: Manufacturer’s standard, factory units to match asphalt shingles Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING 07310 – Page 2 of 3 D. Sheet Metal Materials: Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 coating designation, coil coated with high-performance fluoropolymer coating not less than 0.0336 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Gutters: 0.036 inch thick. 2. Downspouts: 0.217 inch thick. 3. Rake Flashing: 0.217 inch thick. E. Sheet Metal Finish: Fluoropolymer 2-Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat, thermo cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat, containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. Color and gloss as selected by D.F.F. F. Felt Underlayment: Type 1, 36-inch wide, asphalt-saturated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226 (No. 15) or ASTM D 4869. G. Waterproof Underlayment: Minimum 40-mil. Thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet membrane, complying with ASTM D 1970. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. H. Nails: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.120-inch diameter barbed shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing nails with a minimum 3/8-inch diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate at least 1/8 inch through plywood sheathing. 1. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from the same metal as that of the flashing. 10. PREPARATION: A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secure with noncorrosive roofing nails. B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials unit until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 12. INSTALLATION OF ROOF: A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations but not less that those recommended by ARMA’s “Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual” or the “The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.” 1. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with nails. B. Felt Underlayment: Apply 1 layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive asphalt shingles, lapping succeeding course a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails to hold underlayment in place until asphalt shingle installation. 1. Omit felt underlayment at areas of waterproof underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over waterproof underlayment as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 2 inches. C. Waterproof Underlayment: Apply waterproof underlayment at eaves. D. Flashing: Install metal flashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the “Asphalt Roofing” section of “The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual” and ARMA’S Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual.” Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING 07310 – Page 3 of 3 E. Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roof’s lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern; use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacture. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. 1. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. 2. Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner of intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). G. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. H. Install gutter supports at 24 inches O.C. maximum. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flashings, counter flashings and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated in Schedule. B. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop coated with fluoropolymer coating, color as indicated on drawings. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. F. Scuppers: Plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details: B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. E. Seal metal joints watertight. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS 07710 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07710 RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION AND CONFORMANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Scope of work A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment required to complete installation of Aluminum Rain Removal Systems and all other related work indicated on drawings or specified herein. 1.02 References A. Aluminum gutters and downspouts meet or exceed the following specifications: Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Specification 1405.1, FHA Minimum Property Standard 4900.1 and FHA Minimum Property Standard 4910.1. AAMA 1405.1 Specifications for Aluminum Gutter and Downspouts FHA 4900.1 Minimum Property Standard for One- and Two-Family Dwellings FHA 4910.1 Minimum Property Standard for Multifamily Dwellings 1.03 Quality Assurance A. Relevant standards and codes are listed in section 1.02 References. 1.04 Warranty A. Rain Removal Systems shall be backed by an exclusive Lifetime Limited, 25-year transferable warranty. Consult actual product warranty certificates for complete coverage details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer A. Alcoa Home exteriors, Inc., Omega Corporate Center, 1590 Omega Drive, Pittsburgh, PA 15205, (800) 962-6973. 2.02 Materials A. All Aluminum Rain Removal Systems shall be made of 3105-H26 aluminum sheet (minimum tensile strength 26,000 psi, minimum yield strength 22,000 psi) or equivalent. B. The finish is Alcoa's Alumalure 2000®, applied in two separate coating operations and is baked on for added protection and longer life. The finish shall be a two-coat acrylic finish applied in a two- phase operation which includes a corrosion-inhibiting primer and a baked-on, high-performance acrylic topcoat. The finish is highly weather-resistant and provides the gutter with high performance and appearance qualities. The Alumalure 2000 finish system is warranted against chipping, flaking and peeling, inside and out, with a lifetime limited warranty. Prior to painting, the metal shall receive a special cleaning process to assure maximum paint adhesion. The inside of all gutters and downspouts shall be coated with a special gold-colored corrosion-inhibiting finish. 2.03 Hanger Systems Description A. The Rain Removal Systems shall be designed to be free-floating, enabling the gutter to expand and contract with temperature changes, while minimizing stress points which cause buckling and Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS 07710 – Page 2 of 3 leaks. B. System gutters, when properly installed, will support a minimum of 50 pounds (22.7 kg) per lineal foot. Six different types of free-floating hanger systems are available in the 5" (127) series, and four hanger systems are available in the 6" (152.4) series. These hanger systems permit the gutter to be used in both new construction and all types of remodeling work. Gutter hangers to be .051" - .082" (1.3 - 2.1) gauge, depending on the style specified. C. All hanger systems provide a concealed attachment at the front of the gutter, eliminating any exposed protrusions that would detract from the appearance of the gutter. Spikes and ferrules (which restrict the movement of the gutter) and brackets attached to the outside periphery of the gutter shall not be used. 2.04 Gutters and Downspouts Description A. Two different types of high-quality, corrosion-resistant rain removal systems are available, all designed to perform in both residential and light commercial applications. B. The front face of the gutter shall have a concealed locking lip and the high back leg shall be formed with a return hook at the top. The locking lip and return hook function as receivers for the aprons and hangers used to install the free-floating system. C. System description: Traditional Select™ is a premium-quality 5" (127) system used in single-family homes and light commercial building applications. Available with a heavier gauge material in both 2" x 3" (51 x 76) and 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout sizes to accommodate most rain removal requirements. Traditional Select S-6™ works best on large homes where a bigger system will enhance the architecture, or apartments, multifamily complexes and other light commercial buildings. Designed to be a heavy-duty, large-capacity rain removal system, it is available with a 3" x 4" (76 x 102) downspout. D. 2"x 3" (51 x 76) downspout will carry water approximately 600 square feet (65,741.800mm2) of roof area, while the 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout will drain approximately 1,200 square feet (111,483.600mm2). E. Color availability: Traditional Select: White, Almond, Sandtone, Musket Brown, Pebblestone Clay and Terra Bronze Traditional Select S-6: White, Musket Brown and Victorian Grey 2.05 Dimensions A. Gutters: Traditional Select: .032" (.813) gauge, 16'0" (4877), 21'0" (6401), 26'0" (7925, 33'0" (1005) and 37'0" (11278) lengths, six hangers Traditional Select S-6: .032" (.813) gauge, 21'0" (6401) and 37'0" (11278) lengths, four hangers B. Downspouts: 2" x 3" (51 x 76): .024" (.610) gauge, 10'0" (3048) and 16'0" (4877) lengths 3" x 4" (76 x 102): .027" (.686) gauge, 10'0" (3048) and 16'0" (4877) lengths 2.06 Accessories A. All accessories used with Rain Removal Systems shall be accessories designed for use with the gutters and have the same finish. Mill finish accessory components include eave tubes, hangers and expansion joints. Roof aprons: .027" (.686) gauge End caps: .024" (.610) gauge in both the Traditional Select and Traditional Select S-6 Inside and outside mitres: .032" (.813) gauge Sealant material: Alcoa Gutterseal Expansion joints: aluminum lined with neoprene Downspout clip: .014" (.356) gauge B. Nails: Alcoa aluminum nails of 5056 or 6110 alloy having a minimum tensile strength of 63,000 psi. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS 07710 – Page 3 of 3 All nails shall have a suitable etch finish to remove greases and provide additional holding power. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Installation/Workmanship A. Verify governing dimensions of building. Prior to installation, it is necessary to examine and repair any adjoining work on which this work in any way is dependent for its proper installation. B. The gutter shall be installed by using one a six free-floating hanger systems so movement is not restricted. Spikes and ferrules or brackets attached to the outside periphery of the gutter shall not be used. Hangers should be located a maximum of 32" (812) apart and nailed to the roof sheathing or fascia board at rafter locations wherever possible with two 1-1/4" (31.7) or 1-1/2" (38.1) Alcoa aluminum screw shank nails. C. Expansion joints should be used on all hip roof installations, on straight runs over forty feet in length or any conditions where normal movement due to expansion and contraction is restricted. D. A visual inspection of entire project should be conducted. All problem areas should be replaced and repaired in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Upon completion, contractor shall clean all aluminum work and remove all scrap materials. 3.02 Protection A. Care must be exercised in placing aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. B. Aluminum shall not be installed in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, stucco, asbestos siding, masonry, or corrosive non-metallic materials which might become repeatedly wet. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx JOINT SEALERS 07900 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. 1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonneborn). 3. Dow Corning Corporation. 4. Tremco 5. Or Equal B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonneborn). 3. Tremco 4. Or Equal C. Polysulfide Sealants: 1. ChemRex Inc. (Sonneborn). 2. Or Equal D. Acrylic Sealants: 1. Tremco 2. Or Equal E. Butyl Sealants: 1. Bostik. 2. H.B. Fuller Company (PTI). 3. Tremco 4. Or Equal F. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. ChemRex Inc. (Sonneborn). 2. Tremco 3. Or Equal G. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. 2. Sealform Ltd (willseal). 3. Or Equal 2.02 SEALANTS A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx JOINT SEALERS 07900 – Page 2 of 2 D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, paintable. E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION and INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements and ASTM C 1193 for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08112 COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hollow metal doors, frames, and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience-producing products specified in this section and Member of HMMA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: One of the following: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality. 2. Hot-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 569/A 569M, pickled and oiled, commercial quality. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, minimum G60/Z180 zinc coating. C. Insulating Material: Glass fiber or rock wool. 2.02 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Door Construction: A standard 3 feet by 7 feet door shall meet requirements of ANSI A250.4 procedure for level A doors for 1,000,000 cycles and twist test of 300 pounds; provide test reports. B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80; constructed as tested in accordance with NFPA 252 for specified fire resistance ratings. 1. Listed or classified by UL and bearing the fire rating label or seal of that agency. 2.03 DOORS A. Exterior Doors: Galvanized steel face sheets of minimum 16 gage thickness. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. 3. Non- Insulated. B. Interior Doors: Steel face sheets of minimum 18 gage thickness. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. C. Face and Core Fabrication: Visible seams on face sheets not permitted. 1. Stiffen face sheets with continuous vertical sections, formed of minimum 22 gage steel sheet, which, upon assembly, span full thickness of interior space between door faces. 2. Space stiffeners 6 inches apart, maximum; spot-weld to both face sheets at 5 inches, maximum, on center vertically. 3. Fill spaces between stiffeners with insulating material. D. Vertical Edge Fabrication: Join face sheets at vertical edges by continuous welding on each edge, extending full door height; grind, fill, and dress welds to provide smooth flush surface. 1. Single acting swing doors: Bevel each vertical edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches. E. Horizontal Edge Fabrication: Close top and bottom edges of doors with continuous steel channels, 16 gage minimum; spot-weld channels to both door faces. 1. Exterior doors: Provide openings in bottom closure to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 2. Exterior doors: Provide additional flush closing channel at top edge; spot-weld channel to both door faces. F. Hardware Preparation: Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 – Page 2 of 3 1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surface-mounted and non-templated hardware. 3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage minimum. b. Lock face and flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. c. All other surface mounted hardware: 14 gage minimum. G. Moldings and Stops: Same material as door face material, minimum 20 gage, with butt corner joints. H. Provide full perimeter weather stripping including door sweeps and thresholds for all exterior doors. 2.04 FRAMES A. Frames for Exterior Doors: Welded type, of galvanized steel sheet; knock-down frames not permitted. 1. Minimum 16 gage thickness 2. Sizes and Profiles: Indicated on drawings. 3. Provide aluminum drip cap for exterior doors and frames. B. Frames for Interior Doors: Welded type of steel sheet; knockdown frames not permitted. 1. Opening widths up to, and including, 4 feet: Minimum 16 gage thickness. 2. Sizes and Profiles: Indicated on drawings. C. Fabrication: Form frame members straight, and of uniform profile through length, with integral trim, of sizes and profiles indicated. 1. Comply with frame schedule and approved shop drawings. 2. Miter perimeter trim faces and weld continuously; butt interior joints; butt stop joints. 3. Stops: Minimum 5/8 inch in depth. 4. When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections designed for assembly in the field; install alignment plates or angles, of same material and gage as frame, at each joint. 5. Provide temporary steel spreader welded to jamb feet for bracing during shipping and handling. D. Hardware Preparation: 1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surface-mounted and non-templated hardware. 3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage minimum thickness by 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches minimum. b. Strikes: 12 gage minimum. c. Flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. d. Closers: 12 gage minimum. e. All other surface mounted hardware: 12 gage minimum. E. Floor Anchors: Same material as frame material; minimum 14 gage. 1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for floor anchorage. F. Jamb Anchors for Masonry Walls: Same material as frame material; adjustable T-strap, stirrup strap, or wire type jamb anchors; minimum 16 gage steel or 0.156 inch diameter. 1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for wall anchorage. 2. Stirrup straps: Minimum 2 inches by 10 inches in size; corrugated and/or perforated type. 3. Provide the following minimum number of anchors each jamb for indicated frame heights: a. Up to 60 inches: 2 anchors. b. Greater than 60 inches to 90 inches: 3 anchors. c. Greater than 90 inches to 96 inches: 4 anchors. d. Greater than 96 inches: 4 anchors, plus one for each 24 inches, or fraction thereof, over 96 inches, spaced at 24 inches, maximum, on center. G. Jamb Anchors for Frames in Stud Partitions: Same material as frame material; minimum 18 gage. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 – Page 3 of 3 1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for wall anchorage. 2. Provide the following minimum number of anchors, each jamb for indicated frame heights: a. Up to 60 inches: 3 anchors. b. Greater than 60 inches to 90 inches: 4 anchors. c. Greater than 90 inches to 96 inches: 5 anchors. d. Greater than 96 inches: 5 anchors, plus one for each 24 inches, or fraction thereof, over 96 inches, spaced at 24 inches, maximum, on center. H. Jamb Anchors for Frames to be Anchored to Previously Placed Concrete, Masonry or Structural Steel: 3/8 inch diameter bolts with spacers welded to concealed surface of each jamb at: 1. 6 inches from top of frame. 2. 6 inches from bottom of frame. 3. 26 inches, maximum, on center between top and bottom anchors. I. Glazing Stops: Provide stops to secure glazing for frames specified or scheduled to have glazed openings; size as indicated on approved shop drawings. 1. Loose Glazing Stops: Removable channel stops of same material as frame material, minimum 16 gage, butt corners; countersunk for fasteners; secured with Number 6 cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 2.05 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Hinges: 1. Top: 5 inches from head of frame to top of hinge. 2. Bottom: 10 inches from finished floor to bottom of hinge. 3. Intermediate: Centered between top and bottom hinges. B. Locks and Latches: 1. Unit and integral type locks and latches: 38 inches from finished floor to centerline of knob. 2. Deadlocks: 48 inches from finished floor to centerline of strike. C. Door Trim: 1. Door pulls: 42 inches from finished floor to center of grip. 2. Push plates: 48 inches from finished floor to centerline of plate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, check and correct frames for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Installation Tolerances: Do not exceed the following: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, at the upper corner of the frame at the other jamb. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on the jamb at the floor. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed doors for correct swings and site tolerances. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ACCESS DOORS 08310 – Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 2 - GENERAL 2.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Fire rated wall access panels. 2. Related hardware and attachments. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400 – Cold Formed Metal Framing 2. Section 06193 – Plate Connected Wood Trusses. 3. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 4. Section 09510 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings. 5. Section 09902 – Interior and Exterior Paints and Stains. 2.2 system description A. Design Requirements: 1. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors and frames from trades, including mechanical and electrical, requiring access to concealed equipment and indicate on submittal schedule. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Door and panel units: Show types, elevations, thickness of metals, full size profiles of door members. 2. Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of fasteners, locations and types of operating hardware, and details of installation. 3. General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work. Include schedules showing location of each type and size of door and panel units. C. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of access door and panel assembly, including setting drawings, templates, fire-resistive characteristics, finish requirements, and details of anchorage devices. 1. Include complete schedule, types, locations, construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other pertinent data. D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in dimensions. 1. Shop drawings 2. Manufacturer’s literature and data. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01400. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access door and panel units, and frames for entire Project from 1 source and 1 single manufacturer. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ACCESS DOORS 08310 – Page 2 of 4 C. Fire Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire resistance classification is indicated, provide access door and panel assemblies with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), “Building Materials Directory” for rating shown. 1. Provide 90 minute UL label at partitions rated 1 hour or higher. D. Size Variations: Obtain Architect’s acceptance and approval of manufacturer’s standard size units that may vary slightly from sizes indicated on Drawings. E. Coordination: Provide inserts and anchoring devices that will be built into other Work for installation of access door assemblies. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. 2.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Section 01600. B. Package and ship per manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Store per manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Store in dry area out of direct sunlight. 2.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s written warranty per Section 01780. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period at no expense to Owner. 2. Access Panel Warranty: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion of Project. PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 MANUFACTURERs A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Babcock-Davis 9300 73rd Ave. N Brooklyn Park, MN 55428 Toll Free Hotline: 888-412-3726 Toll Free Fax: 888-312-3726 Direct Phone: 763.488.9247 Direct Fax: 763.488.9248 E-Mail: info@babcockdavis.com Internet: www.babcockdavis.com B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01600. C. Specifications and Drawings are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from Nystrom Building Products. Other manufacturers shall comply with minimum levels of material, color selection, and detailing indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. Architect will be sole judge of appropriateness of substitutions. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ACCESS DOORS 08310 – Page 3 of 4 3.2 MATERIALS A. Commercial quality, cold steel sheet with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer. B. Galvanized, bonderized steel with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer. C. Type: No. 304 stainless steel with No. 4 satin polish finish. 3.3 ACCESS PANELS A. Oversized Fire Rated Access Panels for horizontal and vertical applications, Babcock-Davis FRD Series 1. Size: 36 inch x 36 inch. Double door construction. 2. Door: Fabricate from 18-gauge galvanized steel, insulated sandwich type construction. 22 gauge liner. 3. Frame: Fabricate from 16-gauge galvanized steel. a. .875 flange at perimeter. 4. Hinge: Concealed continuous rod opening to 100 degrees. 5. Latching/Locking Mechanism: Factory installed flush ¼ inch allen key, self latching. 6. Finish: White electrostatically applied rust inhibitive prime coat. a. White electrostatically applied rust inhibitive prime coat. 7. Insulation: 1 ½ inches thick high temperature. 8. Automatic Closure Device: Integral automatic spring closure device for each door, will close and latch all doors from an open position of approximately 90 degrees. 9. Interior Latch Release: Mechanism to allow for panel to open from interior side-standard on all panels. 3.4 FABRICATION A. Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. B. Welded construction: Furnish with a sufficient quantity of ¼ inch mounting holes to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. C. Recessed panel: Form face of panel to provide specified recess for application of finish material. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. D. Furnish number of latches required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 EXAMINATION A. Comply with Section 01700. B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. C. Verify mechanical and electrical requirements for ceiling or wall access panels. 4.2 PREPARATION A. Advise installers of work relating to access panel installation including rough opening dimensions, locations of supports, and anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ACCESS DOORS 08310 – Page 4 of 4 4.3 INSTALLATION A. Install access door and frame units per manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed Work requiring access. D. Fire-rated units: Include UL or Warnock-Hersey labels. 4.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust panel after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or damaged. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRE DOORS – ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08332 – Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08332 FIRE DOORS ROLLING FIRE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this Section includes rolling fire doors. B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware; key cylinders for locks. 2. Section 16100 - Electrical; wiring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions for each type of rolling fire door. Include both published data and any specific data prepared for this project. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for approval prior to fabrication. Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, required clearances, anchors, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Rolling fire doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of rolling fire doors. Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: Installation of rolling fire doors shall be performed by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, guides, motors, and related primary components from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. D. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRE DOORS – ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08332 – Page 2 of 4 PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Provide rolling fire doors by Overhead Door Corporation, Pennsylvania Division; Telephone 800-929-2553 or 717-248-0131; Fax 800-929-1274 2.02 ROLLING FIRE DOORS A. Trade Reference: Series 630 Fire Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. B. Label: Provide fire doors certified with the following listing. 1. Rolling fire doors up to 144 sq. ft. and 12' in width or height shall bear the (UL and FM 3-Hour Class A Label.) (ULC 3-Hour Label.)(UL and FM 1-1/2 Hour Class B Label for non-masonry fire walls.) 2. Rolling fire doors over 144 sq. ft. shall receive the UL Oversize Fire Door Label. 3. Rolling fire doors over 144 sq. ft. and not exceeding 18' in height or width shall receive the Factory Mutual Label for Oversize Fire Doors. C. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. 1. Curved profile type C-187 for doors thru 14'0" wide by 12'0" high, fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel. (20 gauge galvanized steel.) (22 gauge stainless steel.). 2. Curved profile type C-187 for doors over 14'0" thru 20'0" wide, fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel. (18 gauge galvanized steel.)(20 gauge stainless steel.) 3. Curved profile type C-275 for doors thru 14'0" wide by 12'0" high, fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel. (20 gauge galvanized steel.) (22 gauge stainless steel.). 4. Curved profile type C-275 for doors over 14'0" thru 20'0" wide, fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel. (18 gauge galvanized steel.)(20 gauge stainless steel.) 5. Curved profile type C-275 for doors over 20'0" thru 24'0" wide, fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized steel. (16 gauge galvanized steel.). 6. Flat profile type F-265 for doors thru 14'0" wide by 12'0" high, fabricated of 22 gauge galvanized steel. (20 gauge galvanized steel.) (22 gauge stainless steel.). 7. Flat profile type F-265 for doors over 14'0" thru 20'0" wide, fabricated of 20 gauge galvanized steel. (18 gauge galvanized steel.)(20 gauge stainless steel.) 8. Flat profile type F-265 for doors over 20'0" thru 24'0" wide, fabricated of 18 gauge galvanized steel. D. Glazing: Not Required E. Finish: 1. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 525 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing, 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester (powder coated) top coat. Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. 2. Stainless Steel: Slats shall be stainless steel with (2B mill finish.) (No. 4 satin finish.). F. Color: Gray polyester top coat. Bottom Bar: Two (galvanized) structural steel angles 1-1/2" by 1-1/2" by 1/8" minimum. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRE DOORS – ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08332 – Page 3 of 4 G. Guides: Roll-formed steel shapes attached to continuous steel wall angle for doors thru 12' wide. Three structural steel angles with minimum thickness of 3/16" for doors over 12' wide. Guides for between jamb doors shall be structural angles. 1. Fastening Guides to Masonry Fire Walls: UL listed expansion anchors, or by through-bolts on soft brick or hollow block walls, or by bolts on steel jambs, or welded in accordance with manufacturer’s listing. 2. Fastening Guides to Non-Masonry Fire Walls: Comply with the manufacturer’s listing. I. Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. J. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03" per foot of span. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. K. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized primed steel minimum for wall openings thru 19' wide. 22 gauge galvanized primed steel for wall openings over 19' wide. Hood shall be equipped with thermally controlled, internal, galvanized steel flame baffle as required. Provide one intermediate support bracket for wall openings over 13'6" wide and two support brackets for wall openings over 19'0"wide. L. Manual Operation: Manual push up (Chain hoist.) M. Electric Motor Operation: Provide UL listed electric operator, size as recommended by manufacturer to move door in either direction at not less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second. 1. Sensing Edge Protection: (Pneumatic sensing edge.) (Electric sensing edge.) 2, Operator Controls: Push-button (Key) (Push-button and key) operated control stations with open, close, and stop buttons for surface (flush) mounting, for interior (exterior) (both interior and exterior) location. N. Automatic Closure: Automatic closure thermally controlled by means of 165 degree or 212 degree fusible links. Operating mechanism will be disengaged during automatic closing. Automatic closing rate will be controlled by a governor. Test and reset lever shall be provided to test release function and reset the door from the floor without tools or special training. (Test lever shall be lockable by padlock provided by others.) O. Locking: (Interior bottom bar slide bolt.) P. Wall Mounting Condition: Face-of-wall mounting or Between jambs mounting. as the condition allows PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRE DOORS – ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08332 – Page 4 of 4 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B Install rolling fire doors in compliance with requirements of NFPA 80. Test fire-release system and reset components after testing. C. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test rolling fire doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces using non- abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product being cleaned. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 – Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08360 OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated. B. Operating hardware, tracks, and supports. C. Accessories and installation hardware.. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads, positive and negative wind loads as calculated in accordance with local code as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A 924/A 924M - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. C. ASTM B 209/209M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. D. ASTM B 221/221M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 4.5 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4.6 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4.7 Installation methods. 4.8 Operation and maintenance data. 4.9 Nameplate data and ratings for motors. C. Shop Drawings: Include opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. E. Verification Samples: For each finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns 1.05 WIND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design doors to withstand positive and negative wind loads as calculated in accordance with applicable building code. 1. Design Wind Load: ____ lb/sf. 2. Safety Factor: 1.5 times design wind load. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of doors specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the types of products specified in this section and approved by the door manufacturer. C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 – Page 2 of 4 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty against rusting. 1. Warranty period: 10 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clopay Building Products Company, which is located at: 8585 Duke Blvd. ; Mason,OH 45040-3101; Toll Free Tel: 800-282-2260; Tel: 513-770-4800; Fax: 513-770- 3519; Factory contacts, Michelle Romie 937-526-4301 mromie@clopay.com; Chris Remick 614- 306-9968 cremick@clopay.com . No other manufacturer accepted. 2.02 OVERHEAD DOORS – GENERAL A. Provide overhead doors manufactured as a complete assembly. Provide each door assembly comprising door panels, brackets, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, and hardware, all as required for the opening size and headroom available. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Hardware: Hinges and brackets manufactured from hot-dipped galvanized steel, minimum 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thickness. Ten ball steel rollers full floating in case-hardened steel races, mounted to fit the taper of the track. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Tracks: Vertical tracks minimum 0.061 inch (1.55 mm) galvanized steel tapered and mounted for wedge type closing. Horizontal tracks minimum 0.075-inch (1.91 mm) galvanized steel, reinforced with minimum 0.0897 inch (2.28 mm) galvanized steel angles as required. 4.1 Track Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Lift application per drawings PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Spring Counterbalance: Torsion spring counterbalance mechanism sized to weight of the door, with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die cast aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable with minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. 4.1 High Cycle Spring: 50,000 cycles. E. Weather stripping: provide complete perimeter seals selected from manufacturer’s standards. 2.03 UNINSULATED RIBBED STEEL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for quantity ) A. Heavy Duty Door: Clopay Model 524 1. Maximum Door Size: 26ft, 2 inches (8.0m) wide by 20 ft ( 6.1m ) high. 2. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.022 inch (0.56 mm). 3. Windows: (3) Three – Full – view sections, pre-painted to match door finish. a. Glazing: DSB Sheet glass. 4. Finish: Exterior 1 mil (.025 mm) coating; interior 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) coating; color as follows: a. White. 5. 4” exhaust port centered in bottom section, leaf type compression spring, 3” full length strut across bottom section, extended solid shaft for motor. INSULATED THERMALLY BROKEN RIBBED STEEL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for quantity ) A. Heavy Duty Door: Clopay Model 3200 1. Maximum Door Size: 26ft, 2 inches (8.0m) wide by 18 ft ( 5.5m ) high. 2. Overall Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51mm). 2” EPS insulation between two sheets of steel. 3. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) exterior; minimum 0.016 inch (0.41mm) interior. 4. Stiles: Steel pre-painted end stiles, minimum 0.049 inch ( 1.25mm) thick, engineered for easy hardware attachment through pre-punched holes. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 – Page 3 of 4 5. Bottom panel section reinforced with continuous 0.050 inch (1.27mm) aluminum astragal retainer with U-shaped flexible PVC astragal. 6. Joint Seals: provide foam strips for field application to stop air infiltration. 7. Windows: (3) Three – Full vision sections, pre-painted to match door finish a. Glazing: ½ inch (12mm) insulated glass. 8. Finish: Stucco embossed texture with 0.040 inch (100mm) minor ribs 4 inches or 5 inches ( 100 or 125mm ) on center, white interior, exterior as follows: a. White. 9. 4” exhaust port centered in bottom section, leaf type compression spring, 3” full length strut across bottom section, extended solid shaft for motor. 2.04 ELECTRICAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide (4) Four – electric door operator (Chamberlain Model J) provided by door manufacturer for door with operational life specified complete with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. Comply with NFPA 70. 1. Solenoid operated brake. B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. D. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS1, NEMA ICS2, and NEMA ICS6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-v, AC or DC. E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overlaod protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3fps (0.2 m/s) and not more than 1 fps ( .03m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 1. Type: Solid State. 2. Type: Jackshaft. 3. HP: a. 1/2hp ( 373 W ). 4. Power Characteristics: a. 115V. b. 1 phase. 5. Service Factor: a. NEMA MG 1. 6. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. F. Remote Control Station: provide momentary contact, 3-button control station with push – button controls labeled “ Open”, “Close” and “Stop”. G. Provide interior units, fully guarded, surface mounted, heavy-duty type, with general – purpose NEMA ICS 6 enclosure in one of the following types; 1. Enclosure Type: Type 1. H. Obstruction detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensing edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 – Page 4 of 4 Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer’s standard take-up reel or self-coiling cord. Sensing edge shall be operated by: a. Electric I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor contols and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. J. Provide auxiliary chain hoist: for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work in this Section. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to unit components. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weather-stripping. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project B. Clean doors, frames and glazing. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TRAFFIC DOORS 08380 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 08380 TRAFFIC DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Impact Traffic Door / Food Service Door. B. Hardware and accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 4.2 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 4.3 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4.4 Installation methods. 4.5 Operation and maintenance data. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details; include door elevations, head, jamb, and Hardware. 1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions ( temperature, humidity, and ventilation ) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s standard five year warranty that products are free of defects in material and workmanship, guaranteeing to replace ( exclusive of freight and labor ) parts proven defective within five years after date of shipment to purchaser. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Mueller Door Corporation P.O. Box 69 Wauconda, IL 60084-0069 800-981-2040 Suzanne@muellerdoor.com B. Substitions: Not permitted. 2.02 IMPACT TRAFFIC DOORS / FOOD SERVICE DOORS A. Food Service Doors; ¾ inch solid proprietary Flexcor polyethylene. 1 Color: Seal Gray 2. Window size: 14 inches wide by 17.5 inches high. 3. Window: patent pending gasket free system. 4. Glazing: clear single polycarbonate glazed. 2.03 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hinges: Double action Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TRAFFIC DOORS 08380 – Page 2 of 2 1. Patent pending M-beam system 2. Stainless steel / aluminum 3. Zero lubrication 4. Integrated pivoting jamb guard PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work in this Section. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify jambs plumb and square. . 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.05 ADJUSTIN A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation.. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project B. Clean doors, frames and glazing. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08410 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and metal infill panels. B. Aluminum doors and frames and door hardware. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the higher of the following: minimum load requirements as stated below, or the load requirements of the applicable codes in effect in the governing municipality, as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.: 1. Wind loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. 2. Positive wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 3. Negative wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 4. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 2.86 lb/sq ft. E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of the installation 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Co. Model Trifab 451 T. PPG Architectural Metals Tubelite Architectural Products Vistawall Architectural Products United States Aluminum Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 – Page 2 of 3 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I color clear anodized. Conforming to Aluminum Association Standards AA-M12C22A31. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. C. Doors: Glazed aluminum; medium stile. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 6 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel. E. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. F. Glass: As required by code. G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 1. Include for each door weather-stripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, pivots, narrow stile handle latch, and closer. B. Weather-stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. B. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. J. Install hardware using templates provided. K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 – Page 3 of 3 achieve performance criteria. L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DOOR HARDWARE 08710 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow steel doors. B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. C. Thresholds. D. Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Keys: Coordinate Owner's keying requirements and deliver keys with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: Stanley, Haeger, or Lawrence B. Pivots: Stanley, Haeger, or Lawrence. C. Latch Sets: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. D. Push/Pulls: Rockwood. E. Cylindrical Locks: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. F. Mortise Locks: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. G. Exit Devices: Von Duprin. H. Closers: LCN, Norton or Yale. I. Thresholds: Reese Enterprises, Inc. J. Flush Bolts: H.B. Ives Co. K. Security Bar: Exit Security Bars L. Exit Alarms: Door Alarm Devices Corp. (DETEX; see drawings) M. Drip Edge: Pemko 2.02 FINISHES A. Finishes: US 26D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08111. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GLAZING 08800 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Libbey-Owens Ford Company. 2. PPG Industries, Inc.. 3. Or Equal B. Clear Float Glass (Type I): Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 2 clear, Quality q3 glazing select. 2. 1/4" mm minimum thickness. C. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering. D. Tinted Glass: Float type, heat strengthened, light reducing in bronze color. E. Wired Glass (Type III): Clear. 1. Square mesh of woven stainless steel wire. 2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type II patterned and wired flat, Class 1 translucent, Quality q8 glazing. 3. Polished both sides. 4. 1/4 inch thick. 2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Insulated Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of 1/4" glass, inner pane of 1/4" glass. 2. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. B. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. C. Edge Seal Material: black color. 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. B. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GLAZING 08800 – Page 2 of 2 properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Gypsum wallboard. D. Joint treatment and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM A. United States Gypsum Company. B. Or Equal 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Ceiling Hangers: ASTM C 754. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2. Edges: tapered edges. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; Type X, UL or WH rated; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2. Edges: tapered. C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: As indicated. 2. Edges: tapered edges. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. As recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. As recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 3.04 JOINT TREATMENT A. As recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceiling Panels: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. B. Suspension Systems: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1: 1. Surface Texture: Medium 2. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 3. Color: White 4. Size: 48 IN x 24 IN x 5/8 IN 5. Edge Profile: Square Lay-in for interface with Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee grid. 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.55. 7. Ceiling Attention Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 35. 8. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on product carton (Not Applicable). 9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL). 10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; 0.80. 11. Dimensional Stability: Standard. 12. Acceptable Product: Cortega Tile & Lay-In, 769A as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. 2.2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot dipped galvanized steel (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross tees are double-web steel construction with 15/16 type exposed flange design. Exposed surface chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching ( exception: extruded aluminum or stainless steel). 1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty. 2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung Unless otherwise indicated. C. Wire for Hangers and Tees: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched, with a Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 – Page 2 of 2 yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange of the same width as exposed runner. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions. B. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install hold-down clips on panels within 10 ft of an exterior door. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 – Page 1 of 3 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. B. Resilient base. 1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to manufacturers requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - A. Amtico Teak (item # W699WEU-WG-B) a. Size: 4.5”x36” beveled edge planks (45 square feet per carton) B Amtico African Slate (item # SL34CTU-PP-B) b. Size: 12”x12” beveled edge tile (45 square feet per carton) C. Amtico Strip (item # Strip-WO & Strip-PO, 1/8” CN34 2mm strip to suit) Amtico customer service will order appropriate quantity of strip based upon sf of tile ordered. . 4. Manufacturer: Amtico 5. Colors: See Drawings REFER TO SHEET F 2.1 2.02 MATERIALS - BASE A. Base: Vinyl; top set coved: Teak (item # W699WEU-WG-B) 1. Height: 6 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Matte. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: Black. 6. Manufacturers: a. Mannington Style -. b. Or Equal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain rooms and areas to receive resilient flooring and base at 70 degrees F. minimum for at least 72 hours before, during, and after installation, or as otherwise required by manufacturer. Thereafter, maintain temperature at 55 degrees F minimum. B. Existing Conditions: Moisture testing has been performed on concrete floor slabs. Test results are included in Appendix A for information only. This information does not relieve Subcontractor of responsibility for performing pre-installation moisture testing. All testing shall be in accordance with methods and procedures detailed In ACI Committee 302 – Strategic Development Council‘s Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 – Page 2 of 3 Task Group on Moisture : Chapter 3 Moisture Testing Basics. A copy of this document can be reviewed in detail by contacting Bridgestone Firestone’s Real Estate and Construction Office at 630- 259-9248. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until work of other trades within the area has been completed. B. Verify that surfaces to receive resilient flooring are smooth, level, and flat. C. Verify that surfaces to receive resilient flooring are clean, and free of grease, oil, construction films, other coatings, stains, dust and other deleterious materials that might affect final appearance or adhesive bond. D. Concrete: Do not install resilient flooring over concrete until concrete has cured and is dry to bond with adhesives. 1.Cure concrete surfaces a minimum of 28 days prior to beginning resilient flooring work. 2.Perform the following tests. If test results exceed flooring manufacturer’s limitations, do not commence installation until corrective actions have been completed. a. Moisture Testing: Perform calcium chloride tests in accordance with ASTM F 1869. b. Perform bond tests in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Perform pH tests in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Inspect materials prior to installation. Do not install materials with visible defects. F. Notify Project Manager of deficiencies detrimental to proper installation. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies are corrected. Commencing installation implies acceptance of surfaces. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. B. Prepare substrates to be smooth, flat, level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as grease, oil, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt, old adhesive residue, construction films and coatings, stains and dust. C. Level substrates to maximum 1/8” in 10 feet and fill cracks using Portland-cement based leveling and patching compounds in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. Do not lay resilient flooring over gypsum-based compounds. D. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with ASTM F710. 3.04 INSTALLATION – FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adhesive – Amtico 373 (item #Amtico 373-4) 4 gallon pail covers approx. 720 square feet Floor Finish – Complete Low Gloss Dressing (item # Complete 1gal.) 1 gallon container covers 2000 square feet Floor Cleaner – Stride Neutral Ph Cleaner Concentrate (item# Stride 1 gal.) 1 gallon container dilutes with water to cover 64,000 square feet 3.05 INSTALLATION – BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. 3.06 CLEANING Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 – Page 3 of 3 A. Remove and replace all defective and damaged materials, including those which failed to bond to the substrate. B. Sweep and vacuum floor after installation. C. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, removing all exposed adhesive and visible blemishes. Reclean surfaces soiled prior to acceptance of project at no additional cost to OWNER. 1. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. D. Seal and wax flooring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Dispose of sealant and adhesive remnants and containers in accordance with applicable regulations, and protective coverings. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for period recommended by manufacturer, but for at least 48 hours after installation. B. Do not place any equipment, casework or furnishings on resilient flooring until the flooring adhesive is fully cured and dried, and the flooring is tightly bonded to the substrate. C. Protect installed flooring from until date of Final Acceptance. Remove protection immediately prior to acceptance. D. Protect work of other trades and existing work; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, as acceptable to Project Manager 3.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01570 - Construction Waste Management. End of Section Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CARPET TILE 09685 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09685 CARPET TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. B. Matching roll carpet for direct glue installation on stairs. 1.02 REFERENCES A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute. 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum 5 years experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet tiles and roll carpet supplied and delivered to site by owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx CARPET TILE 09685 – Page 2 of 2 C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.03 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS A. Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges. B. Lay carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair. C. Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09 77 00 SPECIAL WALL SURFACING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section: Finish Carpentry. 2. Division 09 Section: Gypsum Drywall. 1.02 REFERENCES A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. 2. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 3. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 4. ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 5. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor. 7. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 8. ASTM D3274 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 9. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 10. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels which have been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of joints and fastener attachment. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 2 of 6 D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Submit 2 samples of each type of panel, trim and fastener. E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: a. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. b. Submit certificate of installer’s qualifications. 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 01 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Warranty documents specified herein. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: All products are Class C fire rated per ASTM E-84. Varietex Sandstone finish available in Class A and meets Canadian code CAN/ULC-S102 test method results of <150 flame spread and <300 smoke developed. C. Mock-Ups: 1. Subject to acceptance by owner, mock-up may be retained as part of finish work. 2. If mock-up is not retained, remove and properly dispose of mock-up. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 01 Product Requirements Section. B. Lead Time: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Store panels indoors. 2. Lay panels flat. Do not stand panels on edge. 3. Protect panels from moisture. 4. Do not store panels in contact with the floor or against an outside wall. 5. Maintain optimum storage conditions of 75 degrees F (24 degrees C) at 45 - 55% relative humidity. E. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by using a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 3 of 6 equipment is in operation and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated. 2. Install panels between 60 degrees F - 75 degrees F (15 - 24 degrees C) and relative humidity below 65%, ideally at the same conditions as the room’s normal operating temperatures after building is occupied. 3. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. C PRECONDITIONING: Prior to installing Varietex, remove the packaging and allow the panels to acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours. Ideally, the room temperature and humidity during acclimation and installation should be the same as the final operating conditions. Panels will provide a clean, aesthetically pleasing finished installation. However, by nature, fiberglass reinforced plastic paneling may occasionally have small areas that are aesthetically unacceptable for use. Panels should be inspected on-site prior to installation. If any portion of material will not provide an acceptable appearance, Kemlite should be notified at once. Upon verification of unacceptability, that responsibility is for the replacement of defective material but not for labor or other handling or installation expenses. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1. Warranty Period: three years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide five percent of additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS A. Manufacturer: Kemlite Company, Inc. 1. Contact: 23525 W Eames, Channahon, IL 60410; Telephone: (888) DECOFRP, (815) 467- 8600; Fax: (815) 467-8666; E-mail: decofrp@kemlite.com; website: www.frpdesignsolutions.com. B. Proprietary Products/Systems: FRP panels, including the following: 1. VARIETEX CLASS A a. Surface Texture: Sandstone b. Thickness: 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). c. Weight: 0.73 psf (3.56 kg/m2). d. Size: [4 feet × 8 feet (1.2 × 2.4 m)] [4 feet × 10 feet (1.2 × 3 m)]. e. Color: Morning Mist Gray (636). f. Physical Properties: 1) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 14 × 103 psi (97 MPa). 2) Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790): 0.4 × 106 psi (2758 MPa). Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 4 of 6 3) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 7 × 103 psi (48 MPa). 4) Tensile Modulus (ASTM D638): 0.8 × 106 psi (5516 MPa). 5) Barcol Hardness (ASTM D2583): 45. 6) Izod Impact (ASTM D256): 4 ft lb/in2 (0.21 J/mm). 7) Gardner Impact (ASTM D5420): 25 in-lb (2.82 J). 8) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 0.16% (24 hrs @ 77 degrees F (25 degrees C)), 0.16% (24 hrs @ 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C)). 9) Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A. 10) Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696): 2 × 10-5 in/in°F (36 μm/m °C). 11) Taber Abrasion Test: 0.036% maximum weight loss when subjected to 25 cycles with 1000g CS17 wheel. 2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: 1. Provide panel adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Trim and Seam Treatment: 1. Manufacturer: Acceptable to panel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the FRP panel manufacturer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of FRP panels. 2. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 3. Do not proceed with installation of FRP panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.03 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Prior to installing panels, remove packaging and allow panels to acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours. 2. Wall substrate must be dry and free from dirt, dust, grease and other contaminants. 3. Walls must be flat and even. Remove high spots and fill low spots with material acceptable to panel manufacturer. 4. Remove wallpaper, soluble or loose paint and other foreign matter that might interfere with proper adhesive bond. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 5 of 6 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Inspect panels for any defects immediately. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality. 2. Do not install panels directly over stud framing or furring. 3. When cutting panels, position them so that the saw blade enters the front side of panel first to avoid chipping or damage. 4. Protect decorative laminate face of panel by covering work area. 5. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive bead left by trowel and do not allow adhesive to skin over. B. Joint Seam Treatment: Install panels using the following method. 1. [Color matched acrylic latex caulk]. 2. [Silhouette trims]. C. Installation Using Caulk: 1. Plan panel layout so seams are not directly over seams of substrate. 2. Apply adhesive directly to back of FRP panel with 100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch pattern. Extend adhesive to all edges of panel. 3. Install panel. Place six-penny finishing nails at 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) spacing against the panel about 2 feet (610 mm) apart to hold panels in place while adhesive sets and provide proper spacing for color caulk. Continue installing panels using this method, leaving nails in place during installation. 4. Remove nails after adhesive sets. 5. Place a narrow piece of masking tape along panel edge from top to bottom, exactly at joint edge. Firmly apply tape to both panels. 6. Fill 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap between the panels with caulk, making sure gap is completely filled. 7. Tilt caulk tube back from vertical so that tip of tube advances first in direction of travel. 8. Wet finger and smooth bead if necessary. 9. Remove masking tape before bead cures. Clean off excess adhesive with damp cloth. 10. Install corner moldings as described in molding instructions. D. Installation Using Silhouette Trims: 1. Start in the corner. Mark plumb line 48 1/8 inches (1222 mm) from corner. Set first panel true with plumb line. Where several courses of panels are used on a high wall, use both vertical and horizontal lines to ensure alignment. 2. Install one piece of inside corner molding. 3. Apply adhesive directly to entire back of FRP panel using crosshatch pattern. Apply adhesive to within 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of all edges of panel. 4. Slide panel into molding and withdraw to provide appropriate gap. Align with plumb line. 5. Begin in top corner nearest molding with laminate roller, rolling down and out toward the edge without molding. 6. Continue rolling down and out working across panel away from previously installed panel or initial molding. Remove all trapped air. 7. Install one-piece division bar and caps or next molding by sliding onto panel. 8. Repeat process, working in one direction around room. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SPECIAL WAL SURFACING 097700 – Page 6 of 6 9. Immediately remove all adhesive residues. To remove, clean with nonabrasive cotton cloth and warm water. If necessary, use a mild nonabrasive detergent. For cleanup with solvent based adhesives, use mineral spirits or acetone to remove residue. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean panel surfaces in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Use a clean, damp, nonabrasive cotton cloth and a mild liquid detergent or household cleaner. 2. Rinse with clean water using a clean, nonabrasive cotton cloth. 3. Dry panels with a soft, clean nonabrasive cotton cloth. 4. Do not use cleaners containing acid, alkali or sodium hypochlorite. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PANTS AND STAINS 09902 – Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09902 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTS AND STAINS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Surface preparation and field application of paints and stains on interior substrates. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers. Labels shall include manufacturer's name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, estimated coverage, surface preparation requirements, drying time, cleanup instructions, color designation, and instructions for mixing. B. Store paint products in covered, ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum ambient temperature of 90 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: Sherwin Williams Representative: Wendy Herbst 847- 330-1561 : Office 312- 953- 0775: Cell E-mail: Wendy.Herbst@Sherwin.com PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate and substrates are in proper condition to receive work of this section. B. Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surface to be painted shall be prepared according to the coating manufacturer’s written instructions. All surfaces shall be clean, dry, and dull before painting. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Paint Colors 1. Refer to drawings for paint colors and their respective locations. C. Quality Assurance: 1. Apply additional coats as needed to ensure 100% opacity and a uniform finish. 2. Before work begins, provide a letter of “intent to warranty” from the supplying store. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep project premises free of painting-related debris. Collect material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Protect work adjacent to painting operations from paint spatters and spills. Immediately remove paint that falls on finished surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, using materials and techniques that will not damage affected surfaces. 3.05 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, Synthetic Stucco, Exposed Aggretate Concrete, Fluted Block, Common Brick, Durock and Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Prime (1 coat): Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PANTS AND STAINS 09902 – Page 2 of 4 a. S-W Loxon Exterior Masonry Primer A24W300. 2 Finish ( 2 coats ): a. S-W Loxon Masonry Topcoat A24 Series ( Field Areas ) PT- 9 Row House Tan SW 7689. Finish ( 2 coats ) b. S-W A-100 Exterior latex Flat A6 series ( Field Areas) PT-4 Brandywine SW 7710.. B. Aluminum, Factory Finished Metal Siding, and Porcelain Panels: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Bonding Primer B66A50. 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82 Series, PT-4 Brandywine SW 7710, PT-9 Row House Tan SW 7689. C. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66W310 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W Sher-Cryl HPA Semi-Gloss B66T354 PT-4 Brandywine SW 7710 D. Steel Bollards 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66W310 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W Sher-Cryl HPA Gloss B66Y300 PT-8 Safety Yellow 3.06 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE- CUSTOMER SHOWROOM ,MANGER’S OFFICE,RESTROOMS, CLEAN UP AREA, : A. Gypsum Drywall - Walls: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-shel B20W2200 Series PT-1 Mega Greige SW 7031, PT-2 Harbor Match, SW 9001 ( Customer Showroom ), PT-10 Latte SW 6108 ( Manager’s Office and restrooms ) , PT-12 Latte SW 6108 ( Clean Up Area ). B. Gypsum Drywall - Ceilings: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W ProMar 400 Flat Latex B30W451Series PT-13 Antique White, SW 6119. D. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne Interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series, PT-1 Mega Greige SW 7031, PT-2 Harbor Blue (Customer Showroom), PT-10 Latte SW 6108 (Manager’s Office, Public Restroom ), PT-12 Warm Stone SW 7032 ( Employee Restroom, Clean Up Area ). E. Exposed Overhead Work: Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PANTS AND STAINS 09902 – Page 3 of 4 1. Spot Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): a. S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE-SERVICE BAYS: A. Concrete, Precast Panels, Cement Plaster and Durock and Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite Interior Masonry Primer B28W300. 2. Finish (2 coats): a. S-W DTM Semi-Gloss B66W200 Series, PT-12 Warm Stone SW 7032, PT-13 Antique White SW 6119. B. Gypsum Drywall – Walls: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 2. Finish (2 coats): b. S-W DTM Semi-Gloss B66W200 Series, PT-12 Warm Stone SW 7032, PT-13 Antique White SW 6119. C. Wood – Plywood Ceilings: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer/Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1, PT-13 Antique White SW 6119. D. Wood – Doors and Trim: 1 Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer B28W101 2 Finish (2 coats): b. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne Interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series, PT-12 Warm Stone SW 7032, PT-13 Antique White SW 6119. E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1 Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 2. Finish (2 coats): b. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne Interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series, PT-12 Warm Stone SW 7032, PT-4 Brandywine SW 7710 – ( Exterior ). F.. Exposed Overhead Work: 1 Spot Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): b. S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1 3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE – INVENTORY A. Concrete, Precast Panels, Cement Plaster and Durock and Concrete Masonry Units: Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PANTS AND STAINS 09902 – Page 4 of 4 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite Interior Masonry Primer B28W300. 2 Finish (2 coats): b.. S-W DTM Semi-Gloss B66W200 Series, PT- 13 Antique White SW 6119 B. Gypsum Drywall – Walls: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 2. Finish (2 coats): b. S-W DTM Semi-Gloss B66W200 Series, PT- 13 Antique White SW 6119. C. Gypsum Drywall – Ceilings: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): b. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1, PT-13 Antique White SW 6119. D. Wood – Plywood Ceilings: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): b. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1, PT- 13 Antique White SW 6119. E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 1. Prime (1 coat): a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer B28W101 2. Finish (2 coats): b. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series, PT- 13 Antique White SW 6119. G. Exposed Overhead Work: 1. Spot Prime (1 coat): a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 2. Finish (1 coat): b S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1 END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES (see drawing for applicability) Metal toilet compartments, urinal and vestibule screens. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS Coordinate the work with placement of support framing, blocking, and anchors as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. SANYMETAL Product ACADEMY Series. B. American Specialties C. Or Equal 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments, floor-mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bonded to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded corners ground smooth. 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 18 gage. 3. Reinforcement: 12 gage. 4. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories. C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch. 4. Height: 58 inch. D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screen Splash Panels: 24 inch wide x 42 inch high mounted on partitions adjacent to urinals. Fasten with stainless steel screws spaced 8 inches on center. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. B. Brackets, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. C. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Thumb turn door latch with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. 2.04 FINISH Color: gray, baked enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 10445 – Page 1 of 1 SECTION 10445 DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Door Signs. B. Room Signs. 1.02 REFERENCES ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Sign types to comply with ADAAG requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: ASI or equal 2.02 SIGNS A. Acrylic Graphic Braille Signs: 1. Acceptable product: Seton Series M54xx. 2. Colors: Selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 3. Sign size: 8 by 8 inches. 4. Graphics: International symbols for indicated information. 5. Lettering: 5/8 inch high, raised 1/32 inch, with Number 2 Braille coding. 6. Sign frames: Manufacturer's standard. B. Accessibility Signs: 1. Colors: To be selected. 2. Sign size: 8 by 8 inches. 3. Graphics: International symbols for indicated information. C. Accessories: Installation accessories specified in manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADAAG requirements. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet Room Accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing products of the types specified in this section. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. ASI-American Specialties, Inc 2. Bobrick 3. Bradley 4. Or Equal B. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Paper Towel Dispenser and Disposal: Model Bobrick B-3942. B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Model Bobrick B-254. C. Toilet Paper Holder: Model Bobrick B-2740. 2.03 MIRRORS A. Mirror/shelf: Model Bobrick B-166. 1. Frame: Angle. 2. Mirror: Plate glass. 3. Size: As indicated on drawings. 4. Finish: No.4 satin stainless steel. B. Angle Mirror Frames: Fabricated from 0.050 inch stainless steel, formed to 3/4 by 5/8 inch angle; heliarc-welded corners, finished to match sheet finish; concealed "H" type mounting bracket with tamper-proof fasteners. C. Plate Glass Mirror: 1/4 inch thick polished plate glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, quality q1 mirror select; silver-coated, hermetically sealed with uniform electrolytically-deposited copper plating. 2.04 GRAB BARS A. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 0.050 inch, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; formed 1- 1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc-welded to minimum 11 gage stainless steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. B. Grab Bars: Series Bobrick B-6206.. 1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings. C. Grab Bar Concealed Mounting Flanges: Stainless steel, 3 inch diameter by 1/2 inch deep, with 0.0897 inch steel tenon plate for concealed attachment, using three set screws. PART 3 EXECUTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 – Page 2 of 2 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850 – Page 1 of 5 SECTION 13850 GAS DETECTION AND ALARM PART 5 - GENERAL Provide a Model GVU-1 Carbon Monoxide (CO) detection and control system as specified. SCHEDULE 0 - SECTION INCLUDES PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Remote CO Sensors. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - CO System Controller. SCHEDULE 1 - RELATED SECTIONS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Sheet M-1 of the construction documents PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Sheet E-2 of the construction documents SCHEDULE 2 - REFERENCES PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - NFPA 30A, Section 7.4.7 Gas Detection System PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - UL - Underwriters Laboratory. SCHEDULE 3 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - General Description: 5.1 CO Sensor: a. Provide a remote CO sensor as located on the drawings. The remote CO sensors shall utilize a solid state sensing element, be microprocessor based and be both temperature and humidity compensated for long life and stability. Pilot lights or LED’S (light emitting diodes) shall indicate a) Unit normal operation/NOT in alarm. b) High CO/unit in alarm, and c) shall indicate unit malfunction. b. In the unit malfunction condition the sensors output shall be fail-safe and indicate steady high CO condition. c. The CO sensor range shall be 0 to 250 ppm and shall be calibrated with a CO test gas and be calibrated to initiate exhaust fan operations at 50 ppm of CO concentration. 5.2 CO System Controller A. The CO system controller shall monitor its remote sensor. When a CO alarm level is detected the controller shall delay exhaust fan contact closure for 30 seconds. If the high CO conditioned persists for more than 30 seconds the exhaust fan contacts shall close. The minimum fan ON time shall be field settable from one to eight minutes, in one minute increments. Should the CO concentration remain above the alarm level after the minimum run time has timed out, the exhaust fan contacts shall remain closed (ON) and a second "alarm" set of contacts shall close. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850 – Page 2 of 5 Automatically increase fan speed to meet increasing heating or cooling demands and to reset the room set temperature when the room becomes unoccupied. B. The controller shall have a clock to operate the exhaust fan equipment on a time basis, without high CO concentration. The fans shall operate from zero to eight minutes (field adjustable in on minute increments) per hour. This timed fan run shall be different from the minimum run time setting. A switch shall be provided to enable to disable the time base operation C. The CO controller shall be designed such that in the event of a power failure the control unit shall set itself to an alarm condition and upon power restoration shall automatically activate the fan output to clear any possible accumulated toxic gases. D. The controller shall have an LED to indicate alarm condition of the remote sensor. E. Options available for CO System Controllers: 1. Power "ON" light emitting diode (LED) to indicate power to system 2. Fan ON (LED) indication 3. Local alarm horn and/or light. Horn has silence switch. 4. Remote alarm panel. 5. Calibration Kit. 6. Keyed panel lock(s.) PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Design Requirements: 1. Provide clearly labeled light emitting diodes (LED’s) indicating lamps on the face of the controller panel to indicate the following: a. Power "ON" to system -- Green LED. b. One Red LED to indicate high CO condition (warning level). c. One Red LED to indicate Alarm condition. 2. Provide an audible alarm with a minimum sound intensity of 68dB, on the face of the control panel. Provide an "Audible Silence" push button switch to silence the audible. Audible silence circuit shall be self resetting so that after alarm is cleared the audible alarm will automatically resound on the next alarm activation. 3. Provide a Green LED on the face of the control panel to prove, when lighted, that the remote Sensor has power. 4. Provide a remote CO alarm panel and mount where indicated on the plans. The remote alarm panel shall include a red LED alarm lamp and an audible alarm, with a minimum sound intensity of 68dB. Provide an "Audible Silence" momentary push button switch to silence the audible. The alarm LED must stay lighted as long as the alarm condition persists. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850 – Page 3 of 5 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Performance Requirements: 5.1 Automatic fan run upon power restoration 5.2 Input Power: 120VAC, 60Hz, 1A (fused) 5.3 Relay Contacts: 24VAC, 2A resistive, 1.5A inductive 5.4 Timers: 30 second delay on A. Min. Fan Run Time 1-8 minutes B. Hourly Fan Run 0-8 minutes 5.5 Enclosure: A. Nema 1 standard other available B. Dimensions: 12”H x 12” W x 4” D 5.6 Finish: Gray enamel 5.7 Weight: 8 lbs SCHEDULE 4 - SUBMITTALS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Submit under provisions of Section 01300. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 5.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 5.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 5.3 Installation methods. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories and wiring diagrams. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Quality Assurance Submittals: Refer to Quality Assurance requirements for information description. 5.1 Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria, and physical requirements. 5.2 Manufacturer's Field Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified herein. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 5.1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products. 5.2 Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. 5.3 Record Documents: Project record documents for installed materials. SCHEDULE 5 - QUALITY ASSURANCE PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction and operation. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Installer Qualifications: 5.1 Installer experienced in performing work of this section similar to that required for this project. 5.2 Manufacturer trained, certified or otherwise acceptable to manufacturer. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Regulatory Requirements: 5.1 Building Codes: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 5.2 Housing: UL Listed, fire retardant plastic. 5.3 NEC Class 2 compliant device. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of manufacturing and installation workmanship. 5.1 Provide installation in areas designated by Architect. 5.2 Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and operation are approved by Architect. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850 – Page 4 of 5 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 4 - Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. SCHEDULE 6 - DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. SCHEDULE 7 - PROJECT CONDITIONS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. SCHEDULE 8 - WARRANTY PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Manufacturer/installer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work of this Section for the period stated from date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Manufacturer/installer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct deficiencies: 5.1 Failure due to defective materials and workmanship. 5.2 Failure due to programming and embedded factory installed system information. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall be notified immediately of defective products, and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized repairs or labor. PART 6 - PRODUCTS SCHEDULE 0 - MANUFACTURERS PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Acceptable Manufacturer: TOXALERT INTERNATIONAL, INC., P.O. Box 159, MOUND, MN 55364 Phone 952.472.4541, Fax 972.472.4960 www.toxalert.com PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Substitutions: Not permitted. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. PART 7 - EXECUTION SCHEDULE 0 - EXAMINATION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's Data Sheet including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions and product carton instructions for installation. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850 – Page 5 of 5 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Do not begin installation until areas, supporting construction and substrates have been properly prepared. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 3 - If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. SCHEDULE 1 - PREPARATION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. SCHEDULE 2 - INSTALLATION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SCHEDULE 3 - CLEANING PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. SCHEDULE 4 - PROTECTION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Protect installed products until completion of project. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Protect wiring and devices from subsequent construction and finish work. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. SCHEDULE 5 - OWNER'S INSTRUCTION PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Provide instruction to ensure that the system is operated properly. Training shall be accomplished before Owner's personnel operate the system, and shall occur at the site of the project. Include training of managers, front desk, maintenance, security, and other staff personnel as identified. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 – Page 1 of 5 SECTION 15000 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL: A. The General Conditions, Division 101 of General Requirements, Section 15010 - Standard Provisions, and Section 15050 - Basic Material and Methods are hereby made a part of this section. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete design and installation of Automatic Sprinkler System. B. All areas of the building shall be protected by wet Automatic Fire Sprinklers. The system shall be hydraulically calculated. Density shall be in accordance with NFPA-13 unless special circumstances such as stacking heights or materials to be stored cause other chapters of the NFPA to be required. Follow those chapters for the appropriate sprinklering requirements. C. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall field verify all existing conditions prior to designing and installing system. D. Water supply shall come from a new fire line service complete with double check backflow preventer, and valving as required by the city. Fire sprinkler contractor shall pay all tap fees, permits, and charges necessary for a complete and approved installation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Sprinkler System shall comply with all applicable State and City Codes, NFPA Requirements, and Owner's Insurance Company Requirements; including, but not limited to the following: 1. Uniform Building Code. 2. NFPA Chapter 13. 3. Life Safety Code NFPA-101. 4. Uniform Fire Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Prepare detailed working drawings of the Automatic Sprinkler System. B. Submit drawings and calculations to the Fire Marshal and Owner's Insurance Underwriter and obtain their approval. C. Submit four (4) copies of approved drawings and calculations to the Architect and two (2) copies to the Fire Marshal for their review and approval. D. Submit "cutsheet" samples of Sprinkler Heads to Architect for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. All materials, equipment, valves and devices installed or furnished under this contract shall be listed and approved for use by the authorities, agencies, codes and standards cited in this section of the specifications. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 – Page 2 of 5 2.02 PIPING: A. Sprinkler Piping smaller than 4" shall be Schedule 40 (ASTM Specifications A-120 or A-53) black steel pipe which shall be assembled with 175 psig standard cast iron, threaded fittings or with flanged sprinkler type fittings or grooved fittings as required. Piping 4" and larger may be UL approved steel pipe with grooved or welded fittings as approved by the local authorities. Grooved fittings shall be Victaulic or approved equal, the grooving machine shall be the same as that recommended by the fittings manufacturer. B. Schedule 10 (thin wall) sprinkler piping may be used where approved by the authorities. C. Piping from 5'-0" outside building to alarm check valve installation shall be ductile iron piping wrapped with 3 mil polyethylene. 2.03 HANGERS: A. Provide necessary UL approved hangers to support the sprinkler pipings. Hangers shall be spaced in accordance with requirements of the NFPA Chapter 13. 2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS: A. Sprinkler heads in areas with finished ceilings shall be pendant spray type, chrome finish with chrome escutcheon and shall be equal to Grinnell issue 'C' Duraspeed 1/2" orifice and UL and FM listed. B. Heads in areas without ceilings and with exposed piping shall be upright type, brass finish and shall be equal to Grinnell issue 'C' Duraspeed 1/2" orifice and UL and FM listed. C. Head in vicinity of heating equipment and electrical equipment shall be high temperature heads of the type approved by the appropriate Fire Underwriters Association. 2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT SIAMESE: A. Shall be equal to Potter-Roemer No. 5750 sidewall two way 2 1/2", 2-1/2" x 4" size, chrome plated, front plate with raised lettering, "Automatic Sprinkler", and chrome plated caps attached with sufficient amount of chain. 2.06 GATE VALVES: A. Gate valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Underwriter's approval equal to Jenkins 825A or Crane 467. 2.07 CHECK VALVES: A. All check valves shall be equal to Jenkins 729, Crane 375 or Walworth 883F and equipped with an automatic ball drip to drain the line between the Fire Department connection and the check valve. 2.08 FLOW SWITCHES: A. Provide a Grinnell Series WFD flow switch in each sprinkler system connection serving each sprinkler zone. Switches shall be suitable for connection into the fire alarm system. 2.09 MONITOR SWITCHES: A. Each manual sectionalizing valve and shutoff valve in the sprinkler system shall be provided with a Grinnell F640 monitoring switch to indicate whether the valve is open or closed. Wiring from switches to the fire alarm system will be done under Division 16. The switch shall have a tamper indication if removed from its mounting or the housing cover is removed; it shall signal an alarm when the valve position is altered. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 – Page 3 of 5 2.10 ALARM VALVE ASSEMBLIES: A. The alarm valve assembly shall be equal to Grinnell model A-3 consisting of a service shutoff valve, a clapper type main check valve, an auxiliary seat (alarm outlet), a retarding chamber, and electric circuit closer, gauges, check valves, gate valves, globe or angle valves and cocks. 2.11 WATER MOTOR GONG: A. Water powered gong with clapper roller, clapper, strainer, water wheel shaft, housing, cover plates and other standard components. 2.12 SPARE SPRINKLERS: A. Provide a wall mounted sprinkler cabinet with a minimum of 12 sprinklers of each type installed and a sprinkler wrench. Mount cabinet next to sprinkler alarm valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install with all related items, a completely designed fire protection automatic sprinkler system. 3.02 CERTIFIED CONTRACTORS: A. Fabrication and installation shall be by state licensed fire sprinkler company with experienced, competent workmen regularly engaged in the work. 3.03 COORDINATION: A. Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Required fittings and valves, etc. 2. Overhead sprinkler system for entire building, including all required items, except under exterior canopies and/or overhangs over walkways. 3.04 DESIGN: A. Piping in areas having ceilings, other than the underside of the roof deck, shall be concealed; piping in storage and service areas may be exposed but kept at a minimum distance from ceiling. All piping shall be new, clean and free from rust. B. The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate his work and services with all other ceiling mounted, suspended or overhead equipment and with structural system. No sprinkler lines shall pass through ductwork. C. Deep escutcheons may be used in order to locate heads close to lighting fixtures. Where sprinkler heads occur under overhangs, escutcheons of lesser depth may be used where acceptable to NFPA 13. D. Risers shall be located where indicated on the drawings and be equipped with variable pressure alarm valves. Valves shall be complete with all necessary items, fittings, identification tags or plates, and accessories including alarm valve and water motor gong. Design shall allow for suitable venting and drainage of same, all to meet with the approval of NFPA 13. E. Designs requiring cutting of structural members for passage of sprinkler pipes or hanger shall be avoided. When design, due to economy, appearance and similar aspects, denote the necessity of cutting, it shall be held to an absolute minimum and done only with the Architect's written approval. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 – Page 4 of 5 F. In addition to meeting the National Fire Protection Association No. 13 Requirements, the following will apply to the sprinkler system: 1. The sprinkler system shall be electrically inter-connected to the building fire alarm system. 2. The sprinkler system main control valve shall be electrically supervised so that at least a local alarm will sound when the valve is closed. 3.05 DRAWINGS: A. Shop drawings consisting of the following shall be furnished by the Sprinkler Sub-Contractor: 1. Layout drawing of complete overhead automatic sprinkler system indicating relationship of all other overhead items including light fixtures, location of risers, piping, etc. shall be as inconspicuous as possible, provide a pleasing overhead appearance, and still fulfill all functional requirements. 2. Sprinkler Contractor shall obtain a copy of APPROVED ceiling grid system from ceiling sub-contractor and shall work to this layout when preparing shop drawings and installing work. Cutting of ceiling runners will not be permitted. 3. Pilot plan indicating location of all underground connections, control valves, piping and all related items, and any other items of data deemed necessary by NFPA 13. 4. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design indicated by the aforementioned layout and pilot plan. 5. All shop drawings, prior to being sent to the Architect, must bear the Fire Engineering Dept. stamp of acceptance. B. Furnish and install, next to the sprinkler riser main, a printed sheet, protected by wood framed glass cover, giving brief instructions regarding control, emergency procedure and other data as deemed necessary by Fire Marshal. C. Upon completion of the work, accurately mark one copy of shop drawings showing location of all underground fire prevention system piping, valves, etc., as finally installed. Show location of underground piping and valves by dimension. Also, give flow line elevations of underground piping from street main to building. Upon completion of the job, furnish Owner one (1) neat legible copy of "as built" drawings. 3.06 INSTALLATION: A. Sleeves shall be provided for piping passing through concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls and partitions, through floors, ceilings, walls, or partitions of other building materials. Watertight sleeves caulked with mastic or lead shall be provided for floor slabs and walls on or below grade. Standard pipe or galvanized sheet metal sleeves shall be installed in above grade construction as may be required. The sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to pass pipe lines with couplings or with insulation or annular area for caulking where required. Escutcheons shall be approved floor and ceiling plates made of steel or brass, plain or chromium plate finish and shall be installed around all exposed piping passing through a finished floor, wall or ceiling. The plates shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve opening and shall be provided with springs or set screws to insure them fitting snugly around the pipe. B. All openings for piping should be anticipated and indicated on the approved and accepted shop drawings. Any additional cutting of openings must have written approval of the Architect. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 – Page 5 of 5 C. This Contractor will NOT use air conditioning duct supports, air device outlets or supports, piping or supports as a means of support of any material, accessories or workmen in the installation of the system. 3.07 GUARANTEE: A. The entire installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the building acceptance date. 3.08 TESTS: A. Prior to connecting to the overhead sprinkler piping, the underground main shall be flushed per the requirements of NFPA-13. 3.09 ACCEPTANCE: A. After completion of all installation, tests, etc. and prior to the opening date, the Sprinkler Contractor shall instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system. Provide written operating instructions and mount on wall in a frame with glass front. Include the following so that the owner: 1. Will immediately recognize the main valves are in open or closed position. 2. Will know how to drain the system. 3. Will know how to reset the alarm system. 4. Will know now to make complete weekly inspection. 5. Will know how to maintain the system in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 3.10 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. Contractor shall complete the automatic fire sprinkler system ready for operation, in all respects, as soon as possible. When the system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its intended use. After use, water charges, if any, will be paid by the Owner. *** END OF SECTION *** Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 15010 – Page 1 of 4 SECTION 15010 SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS: Shall be made a part of this section. The Contractor shall read all sections of the specifications in order to thoroughly understand the nature of the entire project, the requirements for coordination among the several trades, and items in other sections which apply to the mechanical work. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK : Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for the complete furnishing and installation of the mechanical systems. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Finish painting unless specified otherwise in another section: Refer to Section: PAINTING. B. Electrical Work: Refer to Section: ELECTRICAL. 1.04 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS: A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities, included within the scope of this contract, have been obtained from as-built plans and/or other substantially reliable sources and are offered separate from the contract documents as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify to his own satisfaction the locations and elevations of all utilities and shall adequately inform himself of their relation to his work. B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for connections to the various utilities as indicated, as well as provide for all meters, meter settings, pads, pits, and covers required by the Utility Company. 1.05 PERMITS AND APPROVALS: A. All work done under this contract shall comply with all local and state codes having jurisdiction and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose services may be used. All modifications required by these codes shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge. Where code requirements are less than those shown on the plans or in the specifications, the plans and specifications shall be followed. B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections and approvals as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and approvals must be assumed and paid by the Contractor. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Shop drawings of fully descriptive catalog data shall be submitted by the Contractor for all items of material and equipment furnished and installed under this contract. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a sufficient number of copies of all such shop drawings or catalog data to provide him with as many reviewed copies as he may need; plus two (2) copies for retention by the Architect and Engineer. B. Before submitting shop drawings to the Architect for review, the Contractor shall examine them and satisfy himself that they are correctly representative of the material or equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall so note on these drawings before submitting them. The Contractor's review of the shop drawings is not intended to take the place of the official review by Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 15010 – Page 2 of 4 the Architect, and shop drawings which have not been reviewed by Architect shall not be used in fabricating or installing any work. C. The review of shop drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the plans and specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such deviations at the time of submission and has obtained the permission of Architect thereon; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for error of any kind in shop drawings. When the Contractor does call such deviations to the attention of the Architect, he shall state in his letter whether or not such deviations involve any extra cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change. D. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is included: Reference to all pertinent data in the specifications or on the drawings, size and characteristics of the equipment, name of the project, and a space large enough to accept an approval stamp. The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment performance under the specified conditions and shall not be a copy of a scheduled data on the drawings. E. Shop drawings shall be submitted on the following items, but not limited to: 1. Fans 12. Water Heaters 2. Plumbing Fixtures 13. Air Conditioning Units 3. Insulating Materials 14. Condensing Units 4. Valves and Fittings 15. Unit Heater 5. Ductwork Layout 16. Fire Sprinkler System 6. Turning Vanes 17. Fire Damper 7. Dampers 18. Vibration Isolation 8. Grilles and Diffusers 19. Infrared Heaters 9. Temperature Controls 20. Compressed Air System 10. Piping Materials 11. Pipe Supports 1.07 LOCATION OF OUTLETS: A. The location of all pipes, outlets, appliances, etc., shown on the drawings are approximate only, and understood to be subject to such revisions as may be found necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. B. Generally, all outlets shall be properly centered in rooms, panels, and other finished work and shall not interfere with outlets or equipment or other trades, and shall meet the dimensioned or large scale drawings of the Architect. C. The Contractors shall coordinate their work with the ceiling and wall finish trades, so that the finished project will be symmetrical. Outlets smaller than the pattern shall be centered on the pattern, while any outlets larger than the pattern or at the intersection of four patterns unless dimensioned otherwise on the plans. 1.08 PAINTING: A. Finish painting of all exposed materials and equipment is included as part of the work of another section of specifications. However, the following items shall be part of the work of this section: B. All pipes and apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned and all rust and grease removed. No nameplates, rotating shafts, bearing bronzes, electric windings, or valve stems shall be painted nor shall any part furnished in nickel or chrome plate be painted. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 15010 – Page 3 of 4 C. All motors, pumps, starters, switches and other apparatus furnished from the factory with enamel finish, shall have all abraded surfaces touched up with the same type, color or paint. D. Materials shall be best quality of their several kinds and shall be Kelly-Moore, Pittsburg, Pratt and Lambert. 1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING: Refer to General Conditions. No joists, girders or columns shall be cut without first obtaining written permission from Architect. 1.10 SLEEVES: The Contractor shall provide sleeves for his service lines (including ductwork) passing through walls, floors, ceilings, roof, etc., subject to the approval of the Architect. All pipe sleeves installed in the vertical position shall be constructed of 26-gage galvanized iron. All pipe sleeves in the horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel pipe or extra heavy cast iron pipe. Oversized sleeves shall be provided for insulated lines and ductwork to pass full thickness of insulation. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surface. 1.11 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS: A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage specified and shall be type recommended by motor manufacturer, for type of service intended. Unless otherwise specified, all motor starting equipment, overloads, pushbuttons shall be furnished by the Mechanical Contractor and wiring for same will be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor except where normally furnished as a mounted prewired component of a major item of equipment. B. Electric motor shall be of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified, and any change in motor size, brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution of equipment having characteristics peculiar to itself requiring such a change shall be the responsibility of the Contractor who initiates the change, and the entire cost of such change including conduit, wiring, motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner, unless substitutions was initiated by Owner. 1.12 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS) : All exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings, shall be provided with an approved chrome or nickel plated plates. Ceiling plates shall be provided with set screws. This shall also apply where pipes pass through the interior parts of cabinet work. 1.13 DISCREPANCIES AND INCONSISTENCIES : Refer to General Conditions. Wherever there are discrepancies between drawings or between drawings and specifications or conflict within specifications, the Contractor shall base his bid upon the better quality or greater quantity called for and it shall be so furnished and installed unless otherwise ordered. 1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: A. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall deliver to Owner operating instructions and maintenance brochures as hereinafter described. They shall consist of typewritten description of system operation, including necessary diagrams, keyed to valve and piping identification systems and shall include various operating instructions as received with each piece of equipment, and one copy of each shop drawing or other submittal data. Operating instructions shall be bound in a hardboard cover secured with fasteners. The project will not receive final acceptance of Architect until this data has been received by Owner. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems for a period of not less than three (3) days. One day of instruction shall be timed to include a normal seasonal changeover. 1.15 ROUGH-IN AND FINAL CONNECTION : The Contractor shall have the responsibility of rough-in for and assembly of various equipment and to make final connection to all equipment furnished by Owner, Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 15010 – Page 4 of 4 or under other sections of these specifications. Rough-in and assemblies of this equipment shall be determined from the manufacturer's shop drawings or as directed and in no case shall the location be scaled from the architectural drawings or mechanical drawings. 1.16 WARRANTY: A. The Contractor shall guarantee all labor and materials furnished by him for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the completed work. Certain work shall be guaranteed for a longer period when so specified. The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement without additional cost to the Owner of any and all defects (including lost refrigerant) which, in the opinion of the Architect, are a result of defective material or faulty workmanship. 1.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION : When each and every piece of mechanical equipment is ready to operate, if it is to the advantage of the Owner or the project construction to operate this equipment, the Mechanical Contractor, under this section of the work, shall allow his equipment to be operated without obligating the Owner for acceptance. The Owner or General Contractor shall furnish the necessary operating personnel to supervise the overall operation of the machinery, but it shall remain the Contractor's responsibility until final acceptance by the Engineer for the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 15020 – Page 1 of 2 SECTION 15020 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, adjust, check, repair and place in service the various mechanical systems herein specified with their respective equipment, accessories and piping. He shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools, necessary to conduct the tests herein specified and those required by the governing authorities. All tests shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer or his representative. B. No work of any nature shall be covered, enclosed or otherwise concealed until properly inspected, tested and approved. Any leaks which develop during any of the tests shall be corrected with new material and made as good as required; said tests shall be repeated until the work is satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner in every way. C. Each separate system with its various components shall be operated by the Contractor for a reasonable length of time to demonstrate the performance of all equipment and piping in accordance with the true intent and purpose of the plans and specifications. All necessary adjustments shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect. D. At no time during testing shall the Contractor vent or release any refrigerant to atmosphere. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BALANCING: A. Contractor shall perform the complete balancing of the entire system. 1. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, he shall check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain conditions in each conditioned space. 2. Prepare and submit complete report on the balance and the operation of the system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF TESTS: The following tests shall be made in accordance with all laws and governing authorities. 3.02 WATER PIPING SYSTEMS: All water piping systems shall be properly tested to assure their being absolutely tight. In the case of pipes which are to be insulated, these tests shall be completed and the piping systems proved to be absolutely tight before any insulation is applied. Wherever pipes are placed so that they will ultimately be concealed, these tests shall be conducted and the absolute tightness of each piping system shall be demonstrated before the system is concealed and made inaccessible. The procedure of these tests shall consist of subjecting a piping system to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi gage for a period of not less than eight (8) hours. During this test period, all leaks in pipe, fittings and accessories, in the particular piping system which is being tested, shall be stopped and the hydrostatic test shall be applied again. This procedure shall be repeated until for an entire 8-hour period, no leaks can be found while the system being tested is subject to the pressure mentioned above. 3.03 WASTE PIPE AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING: Soil waste and vent pipe and condensate Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 15020 – Page 2 of 2 drain pipe shall have all outlets temporarily plugged up. The pipes shall be filled with water testing the system in sections. lf, after 24 hours, the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaksmust be found and stopped by the Contractor, and the water level shall again be raised and the test repeated, until after the 24-hour retention period there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level of the system being tested. 3.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING: A. When the refrigeration piping system is complete, disconnect and cap all lines to gauges and pressurestats that can be damaged by a pressure test. Charge system with two (2) pounds of refrigerant. Open all service valves in system. Replace refrigerant drum with cylinder of dry nitrogen and build up system pressure to 100-150 lbs. in accordance with local codes. Check all joints and equipment for leaks with use of halide electronic leak detector. Relieve system pressure and repair or correct all leaks. Reconnect all capped lines. The entire system shall be evacuated with use of vacuum pump capable of pulling system down to 50-100 micron range. Do not use compressor as pump. Break vacuum with dry refrigerant on small systems or dry nitrogen on large installation. 3.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING: A. Low pressure natural gas piping shall be air tested to a pressure of 6" mercury column for a period of not less than 15 minutes. Readings shall be made only with mercury manometer. B. Medium pressure natural gas piping shall be air tested to a pressure of 25 psi for a period of one hour. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Requirements specified in Division 15, Section "Supplementary Mechanical Conditions" apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - Page 1 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type, where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with set-screw. a. Finish: Rough brass. B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F temperature. C. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - Page 2 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24 gage or heavier, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. 2.02 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. Install piping at indicated slope. D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service areas. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation. J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. K. All pipes through walls, floors, and ceilings, within the building, shall be furnished with escutcheon plates. This shall include all branch connections to fixtures and equipment. Plates on piping in finished areas including piping below counter tops and in cabinet work shall be one piece, brass chromium plated, of the proper size to fit the pipe. L. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - Page 3 of 4 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - Page 4 of 4 M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic (removable) sleeves. N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. O. All cast iron vents through the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed with 4 pound sheet lead. Flashing shall be not less than 20 inches on the roof and shall extend up the pipe tot he underside of hub or flashing sleeve. Counterflashing shall lap down over base flashing not less than 3 inches. P. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7. Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom, where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.03 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady USA, Inc. or equal. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. 2.03 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.04 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 2. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - Page 2 of 2 drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. H. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15082 PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturer: 1. Knauf Fiber Glass 2. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations 3. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02 perm-inches. E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Compatible with insulation. G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements 2. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements PIPING INSULATION 15082 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PIPING INSULATION 15082 - Page 2 of 2 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 3. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 4. Weave: 5x5. I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. J. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. K. Insulating Cement: 1. Manufacturers: a. Knauf Fiber Glass b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. ASTM C 449/C 449M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: all. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Domestic Cold Water, Roof Drainage : a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. b. polyurethane Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 2) Thickness: 1 END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15086 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. B. Duct Liner. C. Insulation jackets. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Manufacturer: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 2. Or Equal B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C 518, 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; b. Or Equal 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; b. Or Equal 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. F. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, RIGID A. Manufacturers 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 2. Or Equal B. Insulation: ASTM C 612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 1. 'K' value : ASTM C 518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: DUCT INSULATION 15086 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DUCT INSULATION 15086 - Page 2 of 2 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; b. Or Equal 2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. E. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; b. Or Equal 2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight, glass fabric. 3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. 2.03 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, RIGID A. Manufacturer: 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 2. Or Equal B. Insulation: ASTM C 1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with poly vinyl acetate polymer impregnated surface and edge coat. 1. 'K' Value: ASTM C 1071 or ASTM C 518, maximum 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm. 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.30 for 1/2 inch thickness. 5. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.45 for 1 inch thickness. 6. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.60 for 1-1/2 inches thickness. 7. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.70 for 2 inch thickness. 8. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 for 1 inch thickness. C. Adhesive: 1. Manufacturers: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; b. Or equal 2. Waterproof, ASTM E 162 fire-retardant type. D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Supply, Return, outside air intake, plenums 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 1/2" inches thick. 2. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 ½" inches thick. B. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 ½" inches thick END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15145 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Storm water. 4. Gas. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with local and State plumbing code. B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 SDR 35. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods. B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.05 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 2.06 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Fittings: Cast iron, coated. 3. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. 4. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings. 2.07 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.08 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 3034, or ASTM F 679. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. 2.09 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 2 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 2.10 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type, with AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 2513 socket type. 2. Joints: Fusion welded. 2.11 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.12 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.13 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.14 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Pipe Size 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.15 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches:Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 3 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.16 GATE VALVES 1. Manufacturers: a.Milwaukee b.Nibco c.Red& White 2. Up To and Including 3 Inches: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 2.17 GLOBE VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. Manufacturers: a.Milwaukee b.Nibco c.Red& White 2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. 2.18 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturer: a. Milwaukee b. Nibco c. Red& White 2.19 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Up To and Including 3 Inches: 1. Manufacturers: a.Milwaukee b.Nibco c.Red& White 2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends. 2.20 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES A. Manufacturer: a. Milwaukee b. Nibco c. Red& White B. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends. 2.21 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 4 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. Manufacturers: Watts or equal. 2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated. 2.22 STRAINERS A. Size 2 inch and Under: 1. Manufacturers: a.Milwaukee b.Nibco c.Red& White 2. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 3. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. 2.23 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS A. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: 1. Manufacturers: 3 M or Metacaulk 2. Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. B. General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: 1. Manufacturers: 3 M or Metacaulk 2. Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. C. DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant: 1. Manufacturers: 3 M or Metacaulk 2. Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479 with metal collars. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 15122. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15260. H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure that piping is not less than 6" below the frost line I. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900. K. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. L. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. M. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 5 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 6 of 2 N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. O. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with applicable codes. 3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer. C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg inch wg. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: Metal Piping Pipe Size Pipe Support Pipe Size Rod Diam. Spacing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1/2" & 3/4 Not over 6'-0" up to 2" 3/8" 1" & 1-1/4" Not over 9'-0" 2-1/2"&3" 1/2" 1-1/2" thru 3" Not over 10'-0" 4" & 5" 5/8" 4" and up Not over 12"-0" 6" & 8" 3/4" B. Plastic Piping: 1. All Sizes: a. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft. b. Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15146 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Hose bibs. D. Trench Drains E. Backflow preventers. 1.02 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply for Owner 's use in maintenance of project: 1. Two loose keys for outside hose bibs. 2. Two hose end vacuum breakers for hose bibs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRAINS A. Floor Drains 1. Manufacturers: a. J. R..Smith b. Zurn 2. ASME A112.21.1M; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (YCO): 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade. 2. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO): 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade. 2. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas SCO/WCO: Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 2.03 HOSE BIBBS, HYDRANTS, VALVES, AND WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade. 2. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. B. Interior Hose Bibbs: 1. Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet 2. Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, integral stops, chrome plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASSE 1011. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15146 - Page 2 of 2 C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Ames b. Watts c. Febco 2. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.04 TRENCH DRAIN A. Furnish and install a polymer channel drain with built in 0.66% slope and all fittings and accessories. Trench drain to be complete with perforated galvanized steel grate with ¼” holes – part # 9870-411 with locking devices , built in drain connections and catch basin at each connection to sanitary line – part # 9860-TS with galvanized steel sediment bucket and foul air trap end closure, shovel head part # 9853 for cleaning channel drain system. Trench drain to be as manufactured by ACO polymer products Inc Division of J.R. Smith MFG Co. (205) 277-8520 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install in strict conformance with all applicable codes. C. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur: janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. D. Pipe relief from backflow preventers to nearest drain. E. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or ¾” minimum, and 18 inches long. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15212 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings. B. Air compressor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 black iron above ground, Schedule 80 iron black below grade wrapped with Scotchwrap #50 tape for corrosion protection. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.02 VALVES A. Gate Valves 1. Manufacturers: a. Nibco b. Apollo. 2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. B. Ball Valves 1. Manufacturers: a. Nibco b. Apollo. 2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 3. MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. C. Swing Check Valves 1. Manufacturers: a. Nibco b. Apollo. 2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 3. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends. D. Air Outlets 1. See plans 2. Quick Connector: 3/8 inch brass, snap on connector with self closing valve, Style A. 2.03 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS A. Unions 1. Ferrous Pipe: 150 psi malleable iron threaded unions. B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. C. Flexible Connector: Neoprene with brass threaded connectors. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15212 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15212 - Page 2 of 2 2.04 COMPRESSOR A. Furnished by Bridgestone/Firestone – (see plans for additional information) installed by Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in accordance with drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions and specifications. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in accordance with ASME B31.1. B. Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate compliance. C. Cap and seal ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water closets. B. Urinals. C. Lavatories. D. Sinks. E. Service sinks. F. Electric water coolers. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER CLOSETS, URINALS, and LAVATORIES A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. American Standard 2. Kohler 3. Crane B. Exposed Flush Valve: 1. Manufacturers: a. Sloan. b. Zurn c. Wade C. Seat: 1. Manufacturer : Bemis or equal. 2. Solid black plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with cover, and with anti-microia agent. 2.02 SINKS A. Single compartment bowl Service Sink: 1. Manufacturer: Fiat or equal. 2. Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gauge brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon, wheel handle stop, rigid supplies. B. Mop Basin: 1. Manufacturer: Fiat or equal. 2.03 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS, ADAAG COMPLIANT A. Oasis B. Elkay PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with the requirements of the drawings, fixture manufacturer recommendations, industry standards, and applicable codes. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - Page 2 of 2 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.03 ADJUSTING Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15430 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to AGA requirements for water heaters. B. Conform to ASME (BPV VIII, 1) for manufacture of pressure vessels for heat exchangers. C. Conform to ASME (BPV VIII, 1) for tanks. D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturer: A. O. Smith B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Lochinvaar 2. State C. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage. D. Performance: 1. Storage capacity: See Drawings 2. Heating element size: 1.5 KW. 3. Number of heating elements: 1. 4. Minimum recovery rate:10 gph with 80 degrees F temperature rise. 5. Maximum working pressure: 150 psig. E. Electrical Characteristics: 1. 120 volts, single phase. F. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch thick glass fiber; encased in corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish. G. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box and operating light. Wire double element units so elements do not operate simultaneously. H. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, molded drain pan, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to AGA requirements. 3.02 SCHEDULES See plans END OF SECTION PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15430 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15500 DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The design and installation of a dry pipe hydraulically calculated automatic fire sprinkler system complete and ready for operation, for the attic space above the service area and inventory areas B. Installation of new sectional valves in the sprinkler/standpipe system feed mains as indicated on the drawings. D. Modification of the existing sprinkler systems as indicated on the drawings. Size system by pipe schedule in accordance with NFPA 13. E. Existing piping to be reused, replaced or removed as indicated on the drawings. Removal of piping to include all valves, flow switches, supervisory devices, hangers, supports, and associated fire alarm system conduit and wire. F. Expansion or revision of building fire alarm system(s) to incorporate newly installed sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices. G. Provide access doors or panels where control or drain valves are located behind plaster or gypsum walls or ceilings as necessary to install piping above suspended plaster or gypsum ceilings. H. Painting of exposed piping and supports to match surrounding background in stairways and other finished areas and red in unfinished areas. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Treatment of penetrations through rated enclosures: Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING B. Access panels for plaster ceilings: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS C. Painting of exposed pipe: Section 09900, PAINTING D. Section 15050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL) E. Alarm Supervision: Section 13850, FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS F. Section 01340, SAMPLE AND SHOP DRAWINGS 1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA A. The design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler system shall be in accordance with the required advisory provisions of NFPA 13, 14, 20, 25, 75, 82, and 231C. Exception to NFPA Fire Codes are as follows: B. Base system design hydraulic calculations using the area/density method on the following criteria and in accordance with NFPA 13. 1. Sprinkler Protection: a. Inventory room with storage less than 3650 mm (12 ft. high): Ordinary Hazard Group 2. Storage height exceeding 3650 mm (12 ft.), per NFPA 231 and 231C. b. Provide sprinklers in accessible shafts per NFPA 13. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 1 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2. Add water allowance of 15 L/s (250 gpm) for inside and outside hose streams to the sprinkler requirements at the connection to the distribution main. 3. Hydraulic Calculations: The calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall no less than 10 percent below the available supply curve. 4. Water Supply: a. Elevation of static and elevation of residual test gage: 600 mm (2 ft.) above site grade b. Static pressure: _____ kPa (psi) c. Residual pressure: _____ kPa (psi) d. Flow: _____ L/s (gpm) e. Date:_____ Time:______ C. For each sprinkler zone provide a control valve, flow switch, self-contained test and drain assembly and pressure gage. D. Provide a guard for each sprinkler in the janitor’s closets, and sprinklers within 2100 mm (7 ft.) of the floor and other areas as required by NFPA 13. E. Locate sprinklers in patient bedrooms assuming all privacy curtains have 13 mm (1/2 in.) openings in mesh extending 450 mm (18 in.) from ceiling. F. Seismic Protection: Seismically brace all new and existing piping systems in accordance with Zone _____ of NFPA 13. 1.5 CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS: A. Design and installation of this project shall be accomplished by a contractor who meets the following qualifications: 1. Engages on a regular and full time basis in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems. 2. Employ or contract on a regular basis for system design, a professional engineer or at least one person having passed the elements for a NICET Level III rating in automatic sprinkler design. 3. Can provide on-site emergency service within four hours notification. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as one package in accordance with Section 01340 SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Sprinkler design professional’s Registration or Certification. C. Emergency service point of contact name and 24 hour emergency telephone number. D. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data: 1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Valves 3. Drips 4. Fire Department Siamese Connection 5. Sprinklers-each type and model 6. Air Compressors DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 2 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 7. Inspectors Test Alarm Modules 8. Sprinkler Cabinets 9. Sprinkler Plugs 10. Pressure Gages 11. Pressure Switches 12. Pipe Hangers and Supports 13. Water Flow Switches 14. Valve Tamper Switches 15. Water Motor Alarm 16. Double Detector Check Valve Assembly 17. Water Measuring Device 18. Jockey Pump 19. Test Header 20. Valve Cabinet E. Detailed drawings in accordance with NFPA 13. Drawings shall be prepared using CADD software stamped by the sprinkler design professional and include all new and existing sprinklers and piping. Drawings are subject to change during the bidding and construction periods. Any wall and ceiling changes occurring prior to the submittal of contractors shop drawings shall be incorporated into the contractors detailed design at no additional contract cost. F. Hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. G. Operation and Maintenance Data 1. Indicating Valves 2. Water Flow and valve tamper switches 3. Alarm Valves 4. Pre-action Valves 5. Air Compressor 6. Excess Pressure Pump H. Recommended preventive maintenance schedule 1.7 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. A mylar as-built drawing and two blueline copies shall be provided for each drawing. One copy of final CADD drawing files shall also be provided on 89 mm (3 1/2 in.), 1.44 mb diskette, for each drawing. B. Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments and any equipment substitutions. C. Four sets of hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system updated to include submittal review comments and any changes to the installation which affect the calculations. D. Four copies of the hydrostatic report and NFPA 13 material and test certificate for each sprinkler system. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 3 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx E. Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments and any equipment substitutions. F. Manufacturers literature, hydraulic calculations, reports and operation and maintenance data shall be in a labeled 3-ring binder. 1.8 WARRANTY A. All work performed and materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects for a period of one year from date of acceptance by the government. B. All existing piping and equipment incorporated into the new system shall be hydrostatically tested and warranted as new. 1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13-1996 ...................................... Installation of Sprinkler Systems 24-1995 ...................................... Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances 25-1995 ...................................... Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of water Based Fire Protection Systems 70-1996 ...................................... National Electrical Code 72-1996 ...................................... National Fire Alarm Code 170-1996 .................................... Standards for Fire Safety Symbols 231-1995 .................................... General Storage 231C-1995 ................................. Rack Storage of Materials 291-1995 .................................... Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1996 ........................................... Fire Protection Equipment Directory D. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) 1996 ........................................... Approval Guide E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) F442-96 ...................................... Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe F. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASTM) 1015-93 ...................................... Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly 1.10 ............................................ POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE AND EMERGENCY SERVICE A. Complete maintenance and inspection service for the sprinkler systems shall be provided by a factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period of one year after acceptance of the entire installation. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 4 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx B. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required maintenance. C. All inspections, testing and maintenance work required by NFPA 25 and recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided. Work shall include operation of sprinkler system alarm and supervisory devices. D. Maintenance and testing shall be performed on a quarterly basis. A computerized preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment, and cleaning of all equipment. E. Non-included Work: Maintenance service shall not include the performance of any work due to improper use, accidents or negligence for what the contractor is not responsible. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All devices and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed for their intended purpose. All sprinklers shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and fittings from inside face of building 300 mm (12 in.) above finished floor to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 ft.) outside building: Ductile Iron, flanged fittings and 316 stainless steel bolting. B. Fire Protection water supply within the building up to sprinkler system isolation valves shall be per NFPA 13, black steel, schedule 10 minimum. C. Sprinkler piping downstream of the isolation valve on wet-pipe systems shall be per NFPA 13. D. Sprinkler piping of a dry pipe system shall be galvanized. Schedule 40 minimum. D. Threaded or flanged fittings shall be ANSIB1 6.3 cast iron, class 125 minimum. Threaded fittings are not permitted on pipe with wall thickness less than schedule 40. E. All fittings on galvanized piping shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. F. Slip type or clamp-on type rubber gasketed fittings shall be listed for each piping application. 2.3 VALVES A. Listed Indicating Valves: 1. Gate: OS&Y, 1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG. 2. Butterfly: Gear operated, indicating type, 1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG 3. Ball (inspectors test and drain only): iron body, stainless steel trim, for 2050 kPa (300 psi) service, indicating type. 4. Ball and butterfly valves shall not be used on incoming water service, and on the suction side of either the fire pump or jockey pump. B. Check Valves: Swing type, rubber faced or wafer type spring loaded butterfly check valve, 1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 5 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx C. Alarm Check: Iron body, bronze mounted, variable pressure type with retarding chamber. Provide basic trimmings for alarm test by pass, gages, drain connections, mounting supports for retarding chamber, and drip funnel. Provide pressure sensitive alarm switch to actuate the fire alarm system. D. Drain Valves: Threaded bronze angle, globe, ball or butterfly, 1000 kPa (150 lb.) WOG equipped with reducer and hose connection with cap or connected to a drain line. E. Self-contained Test and Drain Valve: 1. Ductile iron body with bronze “Drain” and “Test” bonnets. Acrylic sight glass for viewing test flow. Various sized orifice inserts to simulate flow through 14 mm (17/32 in.), 13 mm (1/2 in.), 12 mm (7/16 in.), and 10 mm (3/8 in.) diameter sprinklers, 32 mm (1 1/4 in.) female threaded outlets or 32 mm (1 1/4 in.) one-quarter turn locking lug outlets for plain end pipe (end preparation to be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation). 2. Bronze body, with chrome plated bronze ball, brass stem, steel handle, teflon seat and sight glasses. Provide valve with three position indicator plate (off, test, and drain), 6 mm (1/4 in.) tapping for pressure gage and various other orifice inserts to simulate flow through 10 mm (3/8 in.), 12 mm (7/16 in.), 13 mm (1/2 in.), and 14 mm (17/32 in.) diameter sprinklers. F. Dry Pipe Valve: Flanged , iron body. Provide basic trimmings for alarm test bypass, water flow alarm, high and low pressure switches, gages, drain connections, drip funnel, accelerator and necessary pipe, fittings and accessories required to provide a complete installation. G. Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly: Provide two independent check valves with OS&Y shut off valves, ball type test cocks. Maximum friction loss through assembly shall not exceed 35 kPa (5 psi) at design flow. Unit shall be functional in vertical or horizontal position, rated for 1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure. 2.4 AUTOMATIC BALL DRIPS Cast brass 20 mm (3/4 in.) in line automatic ball drip with both ends threaded with iron pipe threads. 2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT SIAMESE CONNECTION Brass, flush wall type, exterior fire department connection with brass escutcheon plate, without sill cock, and a minimum of two 65 mm (2 1/2 in.) connections threaded to match those on the local fire protection service, with polished brass caps and chains. Provide escutcheon with integral raised letters ”Automatic Sprinkler”. Provide connection with a swing check valve. Install an automatic ball drip between fire department connection and check valve to discharge over an indirect drain connection or to the outside. 2.6 SPRINKLERS A. Quick response sprinklers shall be standard type except as noted below. The maximum distance from the deflector to finished ceiling shall be 50 mm (2 in.) for pendent sprinklers. Pendent sprinklers in finished areas shall be provided with semi-recessed adjustable screwed escutcheons and installed within the center one-third of their adjustment. The sprinkler shall be installed in the flush position with the element exposed below the ceiling line. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 6 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx B. Do not use quick response sprinklers in the same sprinkler zone with other sprinklers types. 2.7 TOOLS AND REPLACEMENT PARTS A. Sprinkler Cabinet 1. Provide a minimum 5 percent spare sprinklers with escutcheons with a minimum of two of each type. 2. Provide a minimum of two of each type sprinkler wrenches used. B. Sprinkler system water flow switch: one of each size provided. C. Sprinkler system valve tamper switch: one of each type provided. D. Sprinkler system pressure switch: one of each type provided. E. Provide two sprinkler plugs attached to multi-section extension poles 2400 mm (8 ft.) minimum. 2.8 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Provide air compressor specifically approved for a dry sprinkler system with UL Listed FM Approved dry valves. B. Compressor shall maintain the required operating pressure on the dry system and be capable of full recovery within 30 minutes of an emergency. C. Provide a 120 volt electrical connection to a non-switched dedicated electrical connection and equip with an hourly run meter. 2.8 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP Provide an excess pressure pump at the fire line entrance to the building, consisting of gear pump and motor, pressure switches, check valve, control box with indicating lights and key operated switch, all assembled and wired on a steel panel designed for mounting directly on the sprinkler riser. Maintain system pressure 70 kPa (10 psi) above peak surge pressure. 2.12 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS Provide for all new and existing sectional valves, riser control valves, system control valves, drain valves, test and drain connections and alarm devices with securely attached identification signs (enamel on metal) in accordance with NFPA 13. 2.13 HANGERS AND BEAM ATTACHMENTS In accordance with NFPA 13 and 14.2.14 WATERFLOW SWITCHES A. Integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type, with two sets of SPDT auxiliary contacts and adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. Set flow switches at an initial setting between // 20 and 30 seconds // 30 and 45 seconds //. B. All conduit and wiring connected thereto, shall be provided in Section 16721, FIRE ALARM-LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEM. 2.15 VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCHES A. Provide each indicating sprinkler, standpipe and fire pump control valve with adequate means for mounting a valve supervisory switch. DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 7 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx B. Mount switch so as not to interfere with normal operation of the valve and adjust to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem is moved no more than one fifth of the distance from its normal position. C. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast aluminum housing, which shall provide a 20 mm (3/4 in.) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valves. D. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel. E. Supervisory switches for ball and butterfly valves may be integral with the valve. F. All conduit and wiring connected thereto shall be provided in Section 16721, FIRE ALARM-LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEM 2.17 PRESSURE SWITCHES A. Provide with 15 mm (1/2 in.) NPT male pressure connection. B. Alarm switch shall be activated by any flow of water equal to or in excess of the discharge from one sprinkler. C. Supervisory switch shall be activated by either high or low air pressure condition. D. Furnish switch in a red baked enamel, weatherproof, oil resistant housing with tamper resistant screws. 2.18 WATER MOTOR GONG Provide water powered mechanical device providing an audible signal when there is a flow of water in the automatic sprinkler system. 2.19 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES A. Exposed piping passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be provided with chrome colored escutcheon plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Supervisory Switches: For each indicating sprinkler system risers sprinkler zone, main service entrance, PIV (post indicator valve), control valve, provide a supervisory switch that is connected to the fire alarm system. test and drain valves shall not be provided with supervisory switches. B. Waterflow Switches: For each sprinkler zone and where indicated on drawings, provide a waterflow switch. Install waterflow switch and adjacent valves in easily accessible locations. C. Sprinkler Zone: Each sprinkler zone shall coincide with each smoke zone and fire alarm zone. D. Piping connections: 1. Sprinkler System Only: Start at flanged outlet within the building at exterior wall. E. Drains, Test Pipes and Accessories: 1. Provide a drain at base of risers, drain connection on valved sections, and drains at other locations for complete drainage of the system. Provide valve in drain lines and connect to the central drain riser. Discharge riser outside over splash block, indirectly over standpipe drain DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 8 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTIONS 15500 - Page 9 of 9 connected to storm sewer, or as indicated. The main drain shall be capable of full discharge test without allowing water to flow onto the floor. 2. Provide test pipes in accordance with NFPA 13. Test pipes shall be valved and piped to discharge through proper orifice as specified above for drains. F. Provide a 690 kPa (100 psi) pressure gage at each flow alarm switch location, at the top of each sprinkler or standpipe riser, at each main drain connection, and on the suction and discharge of the fire pump. G. Conceal all piping, except in pipe rooms without ceilings. H. Install new piping and sprinklers aligned with natural building and other sprinklers lines. I. Piping arrangement shall avoid contact with other piping and equipment and allow clear access to other equipment or devices requiring access or maintenance. J. Install CPVC piping only above gypsum board or acoustical ceiling panels classified for surface burning characteristics (See UL product category BIYR in the Building Materials Directory), or behind a Listed Sprinkler Cover Support System. In unfinished areas with flat ceiling construction and sprinkler deflectors installed within 200 mm (8 in.) of the ceiling, piping may be exposed when listed quick response sprinklers are used. K. Cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and non- threaded pipe connections, shall be affixed near to the pipe where the originated. They shall be displayed until final inspection and then removed. L. For each new or existing fire department connection, locate the symbolic sign given in NFPA 170 a distance of 2400 to 3000 mm (8 to 10 ft.) above each connection location. The sign shall be 450 x 450 mm (18 x 18 in.) with symbol at least 350 x 350 mm (14 x 14 in.). M. Firestopping shall comply with Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING. All holes through stairways, smoke barrier walls, and fire walls shall be sealed on a daily basis. N. Provide hydraulic design information signage as required by NFPA 13 and 14. O. Install access doors in ceilings of rooms where above ceiling access is required. 3.2 TEST A. Automatic Sprinkler System: NFPA 13 and 25. - - - END - - - Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15540 INFRARED HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Infrared heaters. 1.02 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply for Owner 's use in maintenance of project: 1. Owner’s Manual. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: Space Ray or approved alternate. A. Heaters shall be SPACE-RAY LTU series tube heaters, model number(s) as shown on schedule, and manufactured by Gas-Fired Products, Inc., Charlotte, North Carolina, or approved equal as manufactured by Panelbloc, Inc. and Fostoria, Inc. B. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly-efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity of 97.5% and designed for U-tube heaters. The tube body and u-bend shall be totally enclosed with a single reflector to maximize emitter temperature and radiant heat exchange between the firing and exhaust legs. In addition, the reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant heat output and minimum convection losses. The single reflector design shall cover the firing and exhaust legs as well as the entire u-bend. U-tube configuration made of straight tubes with individual reflectors covering the firing and exhaust legs shall not be accepted. C. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 750ºF-900ºF and shall be made of 16-gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm steel for long life (3" O.D. for LTU40-75 and 4" O.D. for LTU80-250). The emitter tube shall be calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, and high radiant efficiency. The measured surface emissivity shall be 0.83-0.86 at operating temperature. The calorization process shall produce an emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive on the interior (0.95) and highly radiant emissive (0.83-0.86) on the exterior. The system shall have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 65%. D. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate under negative pressure at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases inside the building. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed and shielded, fan cooled, and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or lubrication for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90º for vertical or horizontal venting. E. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 100% shutoff system. Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls shall include a pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of combustion air or flue blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring light system. The three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow, and the spark ignition and the combination gas valve operation. F. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame characteristics shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter tube wall. G. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from horizontal, and shall be suitable for vented/indirect vented applications. Heaters shall be designed to operate on natural or propane gas. H. Heaters shall be design certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) to American National Standard Z83.20/CSA2.34. The manufacturer shall provide a written limited warranty covering the heavy one-piece cast iron burner for a period of ten (10) years, the emitter tube for a INFARED HEATERS 15540 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx INFARED HEATERS 15540 - Page 2 of 2 period of five (5) years, and all components utilized in the heater's control assembly for a period of one (1) year. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Gas-fired infrared space heaters shall be furnished and installed in accordance with governing codes and as shown per building drawing(s) as described below: 1. The heaters shall be factory assembled and tested. The only field assembly required is connecting the control/exhauster assembly to the factory assembled body section. This will minimize field assembly to 15 minutes per heater, which will minimize installation cost. The heaters shall not require any field wiring or adjustments to assure maximum performance and safety. 2. The heaters will be CSA design certified for vertical or horizontal venting, maximum 75 feet horizontal sidewall venting, and for 50 feet outside combustion inlet duct. There shall be no draft hoods. The combustion chamber shall be totally enclosed. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15810 DUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Flexible Duct 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. B. Regulatory requirements: UL compliance; affix UL Listing Mark, with Class code, to each UL listed unit. C. Code compliance: Units listed as complying with SBCC. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel sheet, Forming Steel (FS) designation, with G60/Z180 zinc coating. B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 366/A 366M. C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061- T6 or of equivalent strength. D. Flexible Ducts: 1. Manufacturers: a. Zip R Flex b. Tuttle & Bailey c. Metalflex d. MasterFit 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. END OF SECTION DUCTS 15810 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Combination fire and smoke dampers. D. Duct access doors. E. Duct test holes. F. Fire dampers. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Volume control dampers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: Titus or equal. B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. C. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, with push-pull operator strap. 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 5. Sash Lock: 6. Compression Latch 7. Hinge: D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. 2.05 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. C. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - Page 2 of 2 ceramic fiber on top side and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip. D. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. E. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. F. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. G. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range. 2.07 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw; D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings; G. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SPECIAL NOTICE A. The general conditions of the contract and applicable requirements of the general condition govern this Division. B. Read all relevant documents, become familiar with the job, the scope of work, type of general construction, architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and the specifications. Become familiarized with the purpose for which these documents have been prepared and shall become cognizant of all the details involved. Coordinate work with that of others to the end that unnecessary delays be avoided. 1.02 TERMS A. The term "Contractor" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the contractor whose work is covered by this section. B. The term "Architect" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the Architect of Record. C. The term "Engineer" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the consulting electrical engineer. D. The term "furnish" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean to supply the work described. E. The term "install" used in this division of the contract documents means to fix in position the work described. F. The term "provide" used in this division of the contract documents means to furnish the material described for use by others. 1.03 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work under this section to the specifications shall include all labor and materials noted, required or necessary for the complete electrical installation described herein and/or shown on the drawings. All work shall be completed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect and Engineer. B. This work includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. Electric and signal services hereinafter specified and/or shown on the drawings including fees, permits, and provisions for metering equipment as required. 2. Complete systems of distribution and utilization for light and power. 3. Empty conduit systems for telephones an other miscellaneous communications systems. 4. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 5. Rough-in and the connections to mechanical equipment. 6. Rough-in and the connections of equipment furnished by others. 7. Complete signal systems as shown on the plans and/or hereinafter specified. 1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND PERMITS A. Obtain all permits, inspections and approvals as required by regulatory authorities. Pay all fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and approvals. Pay any pro-rata costs for utilities serving this property. B. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, ordinances and utility company regulations. C. In case of difference between applicable codes, specifications, utility company regulations and the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such difference. Should any work be performed that does not comply with the requirements of the applicable codes and utility company regulations, the contractor shall bear all costs arising in ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 1 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx correcting these deficiencies. D. In addition to local, county, and state ordinances and the utility company regulations, the following industry standards and codes shall apply as applicable except where the requirements of this specification are more stringent than the following standards, they shall take precedence 1. ASTM - American Society of Testing Material 2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer 3. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society 4. NEC - National Electric Code 5. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 6. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 7. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories 1.05 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping, and wiring of all equipment and material. Promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' directions and shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work. Should any work be performed that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions or such instructions from the Architect, the contractor shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. B. Comply with all local customs as to which particular trade shall install any part or parts of any work or equipment specified under the heading of electrical work and plan and execute work so as not to interfere with other contractors in the building. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Furnish the name, address and telephone number of those persons responsible for service on systems and equipment covered by the "Guarantee". B. All work shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from date of final completion. C. Upon notice of any electrical malfunction, remedy the malfunction including all materials, equip- ment, and labor at no cost to the Owner. D. In addition to the guarantee herein specified, each piece of electrical equipment shall be provided with the standard manufacturer's warranties for the number of years as specifically noted. 1.07 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR A. Each contractor shall be responsible for all work of every description in connection with his contract. He shall specifically and distinctly assume, and does so assume, all risk for damage or injury from whatever cause to property or person used or employed on or in connection with his work and of all damage or injury to any persons or property wherever located, resulting from any action of operation under the contract or in connection with the work, and undertake the promise to defend the Owner against all claims on account of any such damage or injury. B. Each contractor will be held responsible for the execution of a satisfactory and complete piece of work, in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications and all bulletins and addenda which may be issued during the time of bidding. He shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of his work, even though not particularly specified or indicated, and if he has good reason for objecting to the use of any materials, appliance or method of construction shown or specified, he shall make report of such objections to the Engineer and obtain proper adjustment before the Contract is made, and shall proceed with the work, only with the understanding that a satisfactory job is required. C. Each contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all national, state, local and county codes, standards, ordinances and regulations. 1.08 SUBMITTAL DATA A. Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, make a submittal of all proposed equipment to be used on the job. B. Submit through regular channels submittal data as specified in the Architectural Section of the ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 2 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx specifications. Upon receipt of this data, the Engineer will check, stamp and sign it, retain one copy, and return the remainder for distribution. C. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and accessory to insure compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, and clearly mark each submittal with his signature to indicate that they are in full compliance. Any submittals received without the contractor's signature may be returned without being checked by the Engineer's office. D. Point out all deviations between the plans and specifications and materials submitted. E. Each submittal shall be bound in an individual folder properly indexed and marked to indicate job, contractor, Architect, and Engineer. Data submitted shall show proposed equipment only and shall not be catalogues showing a manufacturer's complete line. Sufficient data shall be included to prove compliance with the specifications as far as use, capacity, efficiencies, physical size, quality of materials, and all other pertinent specified particulars. Data shall include manufacturer's name for each item of equipment being submitted. 1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings whenever equipment proposed varies in physical size and arrangement from that shown on the drawings thus causing rearrangement of equipment space where tight spaces require extreme coordination between ductwork, piping and other equipment where called for elsewhere in these specifications, and where specifically requested by the Engineer. Shop drawings shall be made at no additional charge to the Owner or Engineer. B. All required shop drawings as hereinafter specified, shall be prepared at a scale of not less than 1/4 inch equals one foot by the Contractor. He shall submit prints as hereinbefore described under "Submittal Data." C. Composite shop drawings shall be prepared as specified. Aid in the coordination of this work so that all systems will fit within spaces allotted. Shop drawings shall be prepared to show physical arrangement and dimensions of all switchboards, distribution panelboards, transformers and similar major equipment and routing of all service and main distribution feeders. Shop drawings for switchboards, distribution panelboard and other motor control centers shall include a one-line diagram indicating bussing arrangement. Shop drawings shall indicate manufacturer's name for each item of equipment being submitted. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and accessory to insure compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, and clearly mark each submittal with his signature to indicate that they are in full compliance. Any submittals received without the contractor's signature may be returned without being checked by the Engineer's office. B. In addition to the above, accumulate during the job progress the following data in duplicate prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder. 1. All warranties and guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and material covered by the Contractor. 2. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. 3. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address and telephone number of local supplier or agent. 4. Diagrams hereinbefore specified. 1.11 SUPERVISION A. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and accessory to insure compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, and clearly mark each submittal with his signature to indicate that they are in full compliance. Any submittals received without the contractor's signature may be returned without being checked by the Engineer's office. 1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 3 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx A. The interrelation of the specifications, drawings and schedules shall be as hereinbefore described in the Architectural Sections of the specifications. B. When the drawings do not give exact details as to the elevations of pipe, conduit and ducts, the contractors shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the systems involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct system are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. C. Different electrical outlets, devices, etc. are indicated by symbols scheduled on the drawings. Approximate locations are shown; however, the Architect or Engineer reserves the right to make reasonable changes in locations without additional cost. D. Lines indicating branch circuits do not show exact routing but indicate the arrangement and control of circuits. Conceal raceways (unless noted otherwise) and run in most direct manner between cabinets, outlets, etc. 1.13 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES A. Before submitting proposals for his work, each bidder shall be held to have examined the premises and satisfied himself as to the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate, or that will in any manner affect the work under this Contract. No allowance shall be made subsequently in this connection in behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence on his part 1.14 COST BREAKDOWN A. At the request of the Architect or Engineer furnish, on an approved form, a breakdown of the cost of labor and materials for stipulated items. The total of these breakdowns shall equal the contract amount. This data must be received by the Architect and/or Engineer prior to the approval of the first estimate for payment on the contract and shall be used to evaluate monthly cost estimates. 1.15 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, installation, piping and wiring of all equipment and material. Promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions, and obtain the Engineer's instructions before proceeding with the work. Should any work be performed before receiving such instructions from the Engineer, the contractor shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Materials furnished shall be new of best quality and grade of standard manufacturer, shall conform to the National Board of Fire Underwriters' requirements, and shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories seal of approval. B. Indication on drawings and/or naming in specifications of model numbers of a particular manufacturer shall not be construed as excluding from consideration similar and equivalent items produced by other manufacturers, subject to following provisions 1. Where a manufacturer's name appears in the specifications, it is not to be construed as to mean that equipment by the named manufacturer does not have to fully meet the requirements detailed in the specifications. All similar equipment provided for the project by any one contractor shall be of the same manufacturer whether furnished under the original contract or under a change order, unless specifically specified to the contrary 2. Each item of equipment shall fit plan and space allowed and surrounding conditions and fulfill completely the function for which it is intended as well as item named on drawings or in specifications. 3. Full and complete catalog illustrations, specifications, and descriptive data defining in detail each item shall be submitted to Architect for approval before order in placed for such items. ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 4 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 2.02 SCAFFOLDING A. Furnish all scaffolding as required for the installation of his work. Either arrange for servicing in connection with any rigging and hoisting required or provide equipment to hoist apparatus to be installed into place. Any equipment too large to permit passage through doorways and access ways is brought to the job and set in place before the spaces are enclosed. 2.03 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and turn over to the General Contractor for installation access doors as required to operate and service all equipment and valves furnished and installed by him. Access doors shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings or required for proper access to equipment with mounting straps, concealed hinges, screwdriver locks and so designed that they will open 180°. The doors shall be constructed from 16 gauge steel with door and frame finished in prime coat finish. B. Approved Manufacturers: Josam, Milcor, Zurn, and Wade. 2.04 SERIES RATING A. The entire electrical distribution system shall be series rated for 65KA symmetrical incoming fault current unless otherwise noted on the plans. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Notify the General Contrator sufficiently ahead of the construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, roofs, etc., of the openings that will be required for his work. He shall also see that any and all sleeves that are required for his work are set at proper times so as not to hold up the progress of the job. Any cutting and patching required to be done because of lack of proper coordination shall be done by the General Contractor at the expense of the contractors involved. Do not request the General Contractor to cut any structural members without first having received written permission from the Architect. Cutting of round openings which can be done by the use of a rotary drill may be done by the contractor requiring same. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Before beginning any excavations of any nature whatsoever, make an attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. Then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service. B. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence, carelessness, or failure to comply with the above directive, he will be liable for any such damage and for all expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. C. All necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of the electrical work shall be accomplished by each contractor under his phase of the work. All such work shall be included regardless of the type of materials encountered in the excavation. Refer to and comply with all special requirements in the treatment of open ditches, backfill and backfill material as hereinbefore specified in the Architectural sections of the specifications. D. Trenches for all underground piping shall be excavated to the required depths. Should rock be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches below the bottom of the conduit before laying and the space between the bottom of the conduit shall be filled with gravel and thoroughly tamped. Trenches shall be backfilled with clean dirt as stated hereinafter. E. Backfill shall be installed in layers 12 inches deep, adequately tamped and wetted down or flushed before the second layer of earth is laid in place. This process shall be continued until the trenches are filled. No roots, rocks or foreign material of any description shall be used in backfilling trenches. Any additional materials required for backfilling shall be furnished by this contractor and any excess materials and debris shall be removed from the site by this contractor. Any special ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 5 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx backfill materials shall be provided as hereinafter specified as shown on the drawings. F. All excavating and backfilling shall be done in a manner so as not to disturb adjacent structures and any shoring required shall be furnished. 3.03 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND BASES A. All concrete equipment foundations, bases, and roof curbs as required for the installation of electrical work hereinafter specified will be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of his equipment with these bases. He shall furnish all anchor bolts and other accessories required for casting in these concrete bases and shall also furnish proper template and dimension for casting bases and setting of all sleeves or anchor bolts. After equipment is set on concrete bases, the equipment shall be fully grouted to the base filling all void spaces with a non-shrinking grout. All concrete work shall be done in accordance with applicable portions of the specifications. 3.04 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT A. The contractor shall be responsible to see that equipment proposed by him will fit the spaces available. In certain instances he will note that the equipment is mentioned by name in the equipment schedules. In these cases, it is the equipment whose dimensions and connection arrangements have been used for the preparation of the layouts shown on the working drawings. Should the use of equipment by other approved manufacturers or of other physical shape than those shown on the drawings be proposed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor making the proposal to submit for approval shop drawings showing the arrangement of the proposed equipment in the space available. Approval of substitution offered without these shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of arranging the equipment in a satisfactory workable installation in the space shown on the drawings. 3.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Check with the General Contractor and other contractors, either under his control or those responsible solely to the Owner for any work being performed under this specification to determine whether there will be any interference with the electrical work. If this Contractor fails to check with the other contractors and this work is later found to interfere with their work, then he shall make necessary changes without additional cost or delay to the Owner to eliminate such interferences. B. Where lighting fixtures are shown to conflict with locations of structural members, mechanical or other equipment, provide adequate support and wiring to clear same. 3.06 FINAL OBSERVATIONS A. The purpose of the final observation is to determine whether the contractor has completed the work in a proper and workman-like manner, that he has apparently installed the work in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, and that in the Architect and Engineer's opinion the work is satisfactory for the Owner to accept. B. It shall be the duty of each contractor to personally make a special inspection trip assuring himself that the work on the subject is ready before calling upon the Architect and Engineer to make a final site observation. C. Each contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc. called for in the various articles of this specification, prepared and signed in advance, and together with a letter or transmittal, listing each paper included, shall deliver the same to the Architect at or before the time of said final inspection. The contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, receipt, etc. before preparing same for submission to see that the terms check with the requirements of the specifications. 3.07 CLEANING A. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, switches, panelboards and other devices and equipment furnished and set in place. All surfaces shall be properly polished and shall be free of paint and other dirt and debris. B. Touch up or refinish all equipment furnished with factory applied finishes which have been damaged during the construction of the work. Properly protect the fronts of all panelboards, ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 6 of 7 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 7 of 7 switchboards and other similar equipment to prevent marring and other defacing. 3.08 TESTING AND LOAD BALANCING A. Test all circuits to assure them to be free of grounds. Light and test each lamp. Prove and test energy available at the load side of disconnect switches and final point of connection to driven equipment. The contractor shall make all reasonable tests as required by the Engineer to prove the integrity of the system. B. The various branch circuits served from the lighting panel boards vary in loading. The contractor shall carefully balance the load on each phase when connecting the various branch circuits in each panelboard. When all load is turned on and the system is operating at 100% demand, the imbalance shall not exceed 10%. C. Furnish at the completion of the project or each bonafide portion of the project, a final inspection certificate from the local inspecting authority. 3.09 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION A. When each and every piece of electrical and mechanical equipment is ready to operate, if it is to the advantage of the Owner or the project construction to operate this equipment, the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors under this section of the work shall allow their equipment to be operated without obligating the Owner for acceptance. B. The Owner or General Contractor shall furnish the necessary operating personnel to supervise the overall operation of the machinery, but it shall remain the Contractor's responsibility until final acceptance by the Engineer for the Owner. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation and Backfill. B. Cutting and Patching C. Concrete Equipment Foundation and Bases D. Miscellaneous Metals E. Miscellaneous Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking, etc. F. Joint Sealers G. Access Panels 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010 – Electrical Special Conditions. B. Section 16131 – Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 16010 for submittal procedure. B. Product data for the following products: 1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and anchorage for electrical materials and equipment. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements." E. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product. F. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section. G. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of electrical service, and details for dust and noise control. 1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 1 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70. B. All products shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and shown. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint sealers, access panels, and doors. D. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown. 1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply: 1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations. 3. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information. 4. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. 5. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. a. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for instructions. b. Temporary light and power system shall be furnished, installed an maintained for use by all trades during construction, use 150 amp minimum. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 2 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 6. Use of explosives is not permitted. B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet substrates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS AND DEFINITIONS A. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material. B. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement system. C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand. D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36. B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications. F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 2.04 JOINT SEALERS A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 3 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: 1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work are stated below: a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant: 1. "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 2. "Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co. 3. "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant: 1. "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. 2. "SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co. D. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire- rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire- resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work are stated below: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851," General Electric Co. 2.05 ACCESS DOORS A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling. 1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 4 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. 1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism. D.. Locking Devices: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually keyed; provide 2 keys. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work are stated below: 1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc. 2.06 SLEEVES A. All sleeves passing through walls, floors on or below grade, or in moist areas shall be constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange in the center to form a water proof passage. After the conduit has been installed in the sleeves, the void space around the conduit shall be caulked or waterproofed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation. B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. 1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 5 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances. D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. F. Excavation for Underground Vaults and Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. 1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint. 2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. G. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows: 1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations. H. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 deg F (1 deg 2 C). I. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials. 2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 6 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase. 5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials. J. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris. K. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. L. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. M. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. N. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. O. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils). 1. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material. 2. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material. 3. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils. P. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations. Q. Repair all paving, etc., damaged in the execution of electrical work to the satisfaction of all parties concerned. R. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 7 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas. S. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. T. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect. 3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code." 3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.06 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint sealants. B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 8 of 9 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 9 of 9 3.08 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES A. Install pipe sleeves at all locations where pipe passes through walls, floors or ceilings above or below grade. B. Where subject to moisture or weather, seal sleeves with watertight sealant. 3.09 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND BASES A. All concrete equipment foundations, bases, and roof curbs as required for the installation of electrical work hereinafter specified will be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of his equipment with these bases. He shall furnish all anchor bolts and other accessories required for casting in these concrete bases and shall also furnish proper template and dimension for casting bases and setting of all sleeves or anchor bolts. After equipment is set on concrete bases, the equipment shall be fully grouted to the base filling all void spaces with a non-shrinking grout. All concrete work shall be done in accordance with applicable portions of the specifications. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply: 1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to: a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect observation of concealed Work. 2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work. 3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. 4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. 6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding systems and requirements. 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms or less. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Provide electrical grounding conductors that are sized according to the NEC. B. Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-Listed and labeled for their intended use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding and bonding system with other work. C. Comply with applicable electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps. 2. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors. 3. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated anchors, or preset inserts. 4. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners. 5. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 6. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 7. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 8. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 9. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. D. Formed Steel Channel: 1. Product: Unistrut PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not drill or cut structural members. 3. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. 4. Do not screw into roof decking. Do not support hangers from roof deck. END OF SECTION HANGARS AND SUPPORTS 16070 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS A. All conductors shall be of copper 98% conductivity, 600 volt, conforming to the latest Local Electrical Code and bearing the Underwriters' Label of Approval. B. Except as hereinafter specified, wire smaller than #12 shall not be used. No. 12 or No. 10 branch circuit wire shall be Type "THHN" and all neutral wires for branch circuits shall have white covering. Wire for panel feeders and all wires No. 8 and larger shall be stranded Type "THHN". All wiring for exterior use and wet locations will be with THWN insulation. C. All wire will be color coded as follows: 1. For 208/120V A-Phase - Black B-Phase - Red C-Phase - Blue Neutral - White 2. Green shall be used only for grounding wire to meet local or national electric code requirements. 3. Colors as selected for the purpose of identifying circuits shall be applied to the insulation. The colors must be fast, fadeless and capable or withstanding cleaning in the event that the insulation becomes soiled. D. Conductors shall be of sizes indicated. Conductors shall not be pulled through conduits until plastering is completed and conduits are free from moisture. Soapstone or other lubricants shall NOT be used. Connections shall be made to outlets, fixtures, apparatus, etc., without straining. E. Conductors shall be continuous between outlets without splices, except in outlet or junction boxes. Type of connection must be approved by the Local Code, and will be of the type required if other than as specified above. F. JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Make terminations, taps and splices with an indent type pressure connector with insulating cover 8 AWG and smaller. B.Instead of indent type connectors, insulated spring compression connectors may be used for 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger. Cover connector with insulating tape or heat shrinkable insulation equivalent to 150% conductor insulation. BUIDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx BUIDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - Page 2 of 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. 3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown. B. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16131 CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. All conduit shall be EMT, except where run in floor slabs, exterior or hazardous area. All conduits run in floor slabs, exterior or hazardous area, shall be heavy wall galvanized type with threaded type fittings. All conduit shall be as manufactured by International Tube Company or equal. B. All conduit fitting shall conform to all applicable codes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. D. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. E. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. F. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. G. All conduit to be run as high as possible in the joist space. Attach/support conduit from the top cord of the joists. Do not support conduit from decking or screw/penetrate decking as a means of support. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and duct work wherever possible. END OF SECTION CONDUIT 16131 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16138 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Floor boxes. C. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET BOXES A. Provide and install outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes as required or as indicated. B. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the intended use, and contain knockouts of quantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be connected thereto. All boxes shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient support to the purpose of its intended use. C. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with gaskets and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as applicable. D. Pull boxes shall be as hereinbefore specified for junction boxes in conduit runs. Wires or splices in boxes shall not exceed the quantity allowed by the National or Local Electrical Code for junction, outlet and pull boxes. Where large pull boxes are used, barriers will be installed to separate the feeders. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. C. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements D. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. E. Support boxes independently of conduit. F. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.04 CLEANING Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. END OF SECTION BOXES 16138 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16139 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Furnish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 2.02 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. C. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. END OF SECTION CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16139 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device plates and box covers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES A. Wiring devices shall be of specification grade and the manufactured products of Hubbell, Pass and Seymour, Leviton, Eagle or Slater. Each receptacle shall be constructed to include a grounding pole from which a wired connection to ground shall be provided. Color of all devices shall be as directed by the Architect. B. Switches shall be as follows: 1. Single pole- Hubbell 1221-I 2. Two pole - Hubbell 1222-I 3. Three way - Hubbell 1223-I C. Toggle switches shall be rated 20 ampere, 120-277 volts, except where otherwise shown on the drawings. D. Duplex receptacles 1. Standard - Hubbell 5362-I 2. Isolated Ground - Hubbell IG2162 (Orange) 3. Ground Fault Interrupter - Hubbell GF5362I Leviton, Seymour, Slater, or Eagle will be considered as approved equals. E. Exterior weatherproof outlets 1. Grade level (not installed on rooftops for service rooftop mechanical equipment) weatherproof outlets will be ground fault interrupter outlets mounted in weatherproof box and cover as manufactured by Pass & Seymour #4600 weatherproof heavy cast Aluminum Cover with #4600-26 enclosure with mounting plate tor GFCI outlet. All enclosures shall be keyed alike. 2. Rooftop level weatherproof outlets will be ground fault interrupter outlets mounted in a weatherproof box and cover. F. Provide plates for all outlets, with opening configuration suitable for devices to be covered. Plates shall be in place with screws finished to match the plates. Plates will be brushed stainless steel. G. All plates used for motor starting switches shall be with engraving denoting its function. H. Covers for "FS" or "FD" boxes shall be corrosion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION WIRING DEVICES 16155 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx WIRING DEVICES 16155 - Page 2 of 2 A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. L. Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 to obtain mounting heights specified. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 48 inches above finished floor in service area, 18 inches above finished floor in all other areas unless noted otherwise. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. G. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. H. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16155 EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS, Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and start up. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed conduits shall be held in place by galvanized metal straps or clips. Where grouped, they shall be neatly racked, supported by suitable trapeze or pipe ring hangers; same to be run parallel with and at right angles to beams and walls. The installation of perforated strap hangers or wire will NOT be permitted. Hangers shall be spaced not more than 5 ft. on centers. C. Where conduits terminate in panel boxes, distribution panels, switchboards, pull boxes or starter boxes, provide fiber bushing and lock nuts. Bushings shall be O.Z. Type "A" up to 2" conduit, and Type "B" over 2", or equal, Appleton or Thomas & Betts. Bushings made of thermoplastic or other flammable material are NOT acceptable. D. All conduit which enters the building through the floor or foundation walls shall enter through a hot dipped galvanized cast iron conduit entrance assembly. The shell of this fitting shall be installed in the foundation wall before the concrete is poured. Entrance seals shall be as manufactured by O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type "FSK" or approved equal. E. All conduit entering the building below grade and terminating into panels or pull boxes will be terminated with O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type "KR" sealing bushing. F. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible steel conduit. Final connections to roof exhaust fans shall be made with "Sealtite" waterproof flexible conduit. Provide additional ground wire to assure a perfect ground connection. G. No conduit will be routed on the roof. END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT WIRING 16155 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 8 - GENERAL 8.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section. B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination of work. 8.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of electrical identification, including related accessories. B. Provide electrical identification for the following: 1. Panelboards, motor starters, contactors, disconnect switches, circuit breakers and other electrical equipment with nameplate identifying the item of equipment and the equipment serving the same. 2. Raceways, junction boxes and pull boxes. 3. Wiring devices. 4. Wiring. 5. Three phase motor rotation. 8.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 for products specified under PART 2 - PRODUCTS. PART 9 - PRODUCTS 9.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Brady B. Panduit C. Thomas & Betts D. Seton 9.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - Page 1 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1. Nameplates shall be black engraved surface on white core for normal power circuits and red engraved surface on white core for emergency power circuits. 2. Provide for each distribution panelboard, branch circuit panelboard, transformer and any other similar equipment furnished under this Division identification as to its given name, voltage and origination of service. Examples are as follows: ‘HA’ DPA’ 480Y/277V 480Y/277V FED FROM ‘DPA’ FED FROM ‘MSA’ ‘LA’ TLA’ 208Y/120V 5 KVA, 480V to 208Y/120V FED FROM ‘TLA’ FED FROM ‘HA’ 3. Provide for each motor starter enclosure, circuit breaker enclosure, disconnect switch and any other similar equipment furnished under this Division, identification as to the specific load that it serves and the origination of service. Examples are as follows: ‘CHP-1' AHU-1' FED FROM ‘MCC-1' FED FROM ‘DPA’ 4. Provide for each feeder protective device in each distribution panelboard and any other similar equipment furnished under this Division, identification as to the specific load that it serves. 5. Nameplates shall be laminated, white core, plastic with beveled edges, minimum 1/16 inch thick. Lettering shall be machine-engraved, not less than 1/4" high, cut through the black or red surface to the white core. B. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes 1. Identification shall be with a black permanent marking pen on the top of 4" x 4" junction box covers or on the back of an outlet box cover plate identifying the branch circuits and systems within the conduit. Pull boxes shall be provided with a nameplate stating voltage and system served. C. Wiring Device Wall Plates 1. On the back side of wiring device wall plates identify with a black permanent marking pen the panelboard and branch circuit number the device is served from. D. Wire Markers 1. Wire markers for identification of wiring shall be self-adhesive type having letters and numerals indicating serving equipment and feeder or branch circuit number. E. Rotation Tags 1. Rotation tags shall be brass or aluminum securely attached to equipment. PART 10 - EXECUTION 10.1 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive labels or nameplates shall be carefully prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - Page 2 of 3 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - Page 3 of 3 10.2 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be properly attached to identify panelboards, feeder circuit breakers, disconnect switches, pull boxes and other similar equipment furnished under this Division. 10.3 WIRE MARKERS A. Wire markers shall be applied to each conductor or cable within panelboards, motor starter enclosures, circuit breaker enclosures, disconnect switches, cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes, and other similar equipment identifying the serving equipment and feeder or branch circuit from which the conductors originate. END OF SECTION 16195 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16210 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL PRIOR TO BID CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR AND LOCATION OF (NEW OR EXISTING AS PER UTILITY COMPANY) ELECTUICAL TRANSFORMER WITH UTILITY COMPANY AT INTIATION OF JOB/AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Utility Services 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. B. Submit utility company-prepared drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with a Utility Company representative. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Utility Transformer Pad: Concrete or as required by Utility Company. B. Other Components: As required by Utility Company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install service rack, weatherhead, transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base as required by utility company. B. Install in accordance with NECA “Standard of Installation”. END OF SECTION SECTION 16412 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 16210 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D General Electric Siemens Challenger 2.02 COMPONENTS A. All safety switches shall have provision for padlocking in either "ON" or "OFF" positions, shall be quick make and break, load break, with Type "A" mechanisms with spring reinforced fuse clips and switch contacts, shall be totally enclosed, externally operated, dual rated, shall conform in all respects to Panelboards Specifications above insofar as they apply, shall be fusible except as noted, and shall be “Square D” Heavy Duty Type or equal. B. Safety switches manufacturer shall match manufacturer of switchgear, motor starters, lighting and appliance panelboard, and distribution panelboards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5. END OF SECTION ENCLOSURED SWITCHES 16412 - Page 2 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16426 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose contactors. B. Lighting contactors. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Square D or equal. Accessories: 1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF. 2. Selector Switch: ON/OFF. 3. Indicating Light: RED. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open. 5. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. 2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. B. Configuration: Electrically held. C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. D. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads. 2.04 DISCONNECTS A. Combination Contactors: Combine contactor with disconnect in common enclosure. B. Disconnects: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker; NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. C. Disconnects: Fusible switch assembly; NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. C. Provide fuses for fusible switches. D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform applicable inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.16.1. END OF SECTION ENCLOSED CONTRACTORS 16426 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16442 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Switchboards. . Switchboard accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose. 1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Furnish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Siemens A. Square D I-Line B. General Electric C. Challenger 2.02 SWITCHBOARDS A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified. B. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120/208 volts. 2. Configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded. 3. Main Bus: As shown on drawing 4. Integrated Equipment Rating: As shown on drawing C. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted. D. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. E. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted. F. Bus Material: Copper, standard size. G. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. H. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. I. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. 2. Include shunt trip where indicated. J. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breakers. 1. Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16442 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16442 - Page 2 of 2 2. Interrupting rating 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. 3. Include shunt trip where indicated. K. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the conductor materials and sizes indicated. L. Metering Transformer Compartment: For utility company's use; compartment size, bus spacing and drilling, door, and locking and sealing requirements in accordance with Section 16210. M. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as indicated. N. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose. 1. Align sections at front and rear. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. 3. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections and devices in single line form on the front panels of the switchboard. a. Use blue factory painting. b. Use plastic strips. c. Fasten strips flat against the panel face with screws or rivets. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop inspect and test switchboard according to NEMA PB 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1. B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. C. Install fuses in each switch. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.1. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated. 3.04 CLEANING Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16443 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Distribution panelboards. B. Branch circuit panelboards. C. Load centers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose. 1.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Furnish two of each panelboard key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Power Distribution Panelboards shall be of the size and capacity as shown on the drawings and similar in features to Panelboards as previously specified. B. Mains and branches shall be circuit breaker type similar to those specified under panelboard section. C. Steel directory frame with glass front with typed directory card to fit holder in door. D. Distribution Panelboards shall be type I-LINE as manufactured by Square "D", Siemens, General Electric, or Challenger. E. Distribution panelboard manufacturer shall match manufacturer of motor starters, lighting and appliance panelboard, and safety switches. 2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall contain the following: 1. Code gauge galvanized steel cabinets. 2. Adjustable trim tabs on all flush mounted cabinets. 3. Baked gray enamel finish on all exposed metal parts. 4. Flush doors with ring catch and master keyed flush cylinder lock on all branch circuit lighting panelboards. 5. Stud mountings sufficient to support front panels on all surface mounted panelboards (to facilitate mounting same). 6. Steel directory frame with glass front and neatly typed circuit directory to fit holder on door. 7. Completely enclosed dead front construction, except as otherwise noted. 8. Silver plated contacts, wire terminals and copper bus connections. 9. Copper bus 10. The number, size and type of mains and brances as indicated on the plan. 11. Double row panels shall be separated by a 1" air space. 12. Solderless wire terminals on both mains and branches. 13. Contactors will be of the mechanically held type as manufactured by Automatic Switch Company or Zenith. B. All Circuit Breakers shall contain the following: 1. Quick-make and quick-break mechanism. 2. Dual thermal magnetic trip elements. 3. Common trips on all multi-pole breakers (no handle ties will be allowed) 4. Positive "OFF" positions. 5. Trip free handles. PANELBOARDS 16443 - Page 1 of 2 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx PANELBOARDS 16443 - Page 2 of 2 6. Switching duty rated, HACR rating for all breakers feeding heat pumps or air conditioners. 7. All circuits switched from panels will be rated for switch duty. 8. Sequenced phased with ODD numbers on the left and EVEN numbers on the right. 9. All breakers will be bolted to the bus and panel. C. Panelboards will be as manufactured by Square "D" type NQOD or NEHB (as voltage appropriate), Siemens, General Electric or Challenger. D. Lighting and appliance panelboard manufacturer shall match manufacturer of motor starters, distribution panelboards and safety switches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA Standard of Installation. B. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075. F. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. 1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for circuit breakers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINARIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaries and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES Furnish products as indicated in drawing fixture schedule. 2.02 LAMPS Lamp Types: As specified for each luminaire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaries and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. D. Install surface mounted luminaries and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaries in grid ceiling directly from building structure. F. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaries in place. I. Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. J. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION INTERIOR LUMINARIES 16510 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. B. Poles. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish two of each type and wattage lamp installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES Furnish products as indicated in drawing fixture schedule PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in accordance with Section 03300. B. Install poles plumb. 1. Provide shims to adjust plumb. 2. Grout around each base. C. Install lamps in each luminaire. D. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION EXTERIOR LUMINARIES 16520 - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A. SCOPE & RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual zone supervision, individual NAC supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. Include a control panel, manual stations (fire alarm boxes), automatic fire detectors, indicating devices, remote enunciators, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. 2. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 3. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 4. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, Local Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760. 5. Additionally, the entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within the guidelines of the BOCA Basic Building Code. 6. The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. B. REFERENCES NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code® BOCA Other Applicable Codes and/or Standards C. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1. Equipment: All devices, combinations of devices, notification appliances, and equipment, shall be listed for the protective signaling purpose for which they are used and shall be installed in compliance with applicable codes and standards. 2. Type of System: The control panel shall be Listed for power-limited applications per NEC 760 and for compliance with the National Fire Protection Association Standards NFPA 72; for Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station, and/or Proprietary fire protective signaling systems. 3. Type of Service: The control panel shall be Listed for the applicable types of service, i.e.; Manual Alarm, Automatic Alarm, Waterflow Alarm and/or Sprinkler Supervisory Service. 4. Type of Signaling: The control panel shall be Listed for the applicable types of signaling methods used, i.e.; Temporal Coded, Zone Coded, Non-Coded, March Time and/or Digital Alarm Communicator (DACT) Signaling. D. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Fire Alarm System: Provide a complete, supervised, power-limited, fire detection and evacuation system. 2. All equipment herein specified is that of Simplex Time Recorder Co. and depicts the type and quality of the equipment to be furnished. Refer to Submittals, Products/Manufacturers, and Products/Substitutions sections in this specification for further information and qualifications. 3. System Supervision: The fire protective signaling system shall be an electrically supervised system which shall monitor the integrity of circuit conductors and power supplies. Remote annunciator LEDs and associated wiring and remote emergency control wiring shall be supervised; whereas, an open condition in the circuit shall cause a trouble indication at the control panel. 4. The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on-site programming to accommodate facility expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. All software operations are to be stored in a non- volatile, programmable memory resident within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory. 5. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, and special coded FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 1 of 8 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the system. 6. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be individually configurable on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a non-latching circuit, or a alarm verification circuit. 7. The control panel shall provide a minimum of 4 amps of power for notification appliances and auxiliary devices. Provisions shall be available for expanding the standard power to provide an additional 5 amps of power for notification appliances and auxiliary devices. 1.02 MANUFACTURERS A. The fire alarm system specified is manufactured by the Simplex Time Recorder Co. Catalog and model numbers are intended to establish the type and quality of equipment and system design as well as exact operating features required. The manufacturer's specification sheets of each item so listed shall be considered to be part of the specification and binding therein. B. Substitutions of products proposed to be equal to those specified herein will be considered only when the following requirements have been met: 1. A complete list of such substituted products, with drawings or data sheets, shall be submitted to and approved by the architect and/or consulting engineer, not less than ten (10) calendar days prior to scheduled date of opening of bids. 2. A bidder intending to use acceptable substitute products shall submit two price quotations: one based on the use of products specified herein; the other shall define the use of substitute products and list cost differentials as related to the base quotation. C. Acceptable Substitute Manufacturers 1. Notifier D. OPERATION 1. Under normal condition, the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the current time and date. 2. Should an abnormal condition be detected, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions. 3. The following three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition shall be displayed simultaneously in alphanumeric format. Systems not capable of such a display on the panel faceplate shall include a CRT display meeting the above requirements and must provide a secondary power supply to maintain CRT operation for the duration of the standby requirements of the panel. Information shall include: 4. Custom location label (40 characters minimum). 5. Type of device (i.e. smoke, pull station, waterflow). 6. Status (i.e. alarm, trouble). 7. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or trouble condition. The acknowledge functions may be passcode protected if the user has insufficient privilege to acknowledge such conditions. A message shall indicate insufficient privilege but allow the user to view the points without acknowledging them. Should the user have sufficient privilege to acknowledge, a message shall be displayed informing the user that the condition has been acknowledged. 8. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. 9. After all the points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible signal shall be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated. The first 10 fire alarm zones shall be displayed simultaneously in chronological order. 10. Alarm Silencing a. Pressing the "Alarm Silence" button shall cause all notification appliances programmed for “On-Until- Silenced” to be deactivated. A separate panel mounted yellow LED shall illuminate to indicate the alarm silenced mode. b. All NACs programmed for “On-Until-Reset” shall remain activated until the system is Reset. 11. Alarm Silence Inhibit Timer a. Operation shall include a programmable duration timer that specifies the length of time that notification appliances shall not be deactivated during alarm silence inhibit mode. b. The inhibit timer shall be programmable from 0 to 60 minutes in duration. 12. System Reset Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx conditions be cleared. b. Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall be on. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the points. These points shall not require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged. c. Should the Alarm Silence Inhibit function be active, the "System Reset" key press shall be ignored and a message shall be displayed for a short time to indicate that the reset was inhibited. For operator assurance, a message indicating that reset is no longer inhibited shall be displayed when the inhibit function time expires. 13. History Logging. a. The control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of fifty (50) events in an alarm log plus a minimum of one hundred (100) events in a separate trouble log. These events shall be stored in a battery protected random access memory (RAM). Systems not having discrete alarm and trouble logging memory shall include an alternate supervised (e.g.: floppy drive, tape cassette) historic recording method with battery backup. Real time and date shall accompany all history event recording. b. History logs shall be capable of being viewed separately or shall be selectable for viewing as a combined history log that displays both alarm and trouble events in chronological order. 14. Walk Test System Testing a. The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in the test mode, the system shall display a trouble condition. b. While in the walk test mode, the activation of an initiating device shall be silently logged as an alarm in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset after logging the alarm. c. The momentary disconnection of an initiating device or notification appliance shall be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition. d. Integrity of the installation conductors of IDCs and NACs shall be verified by momentarily opening any circuit. e. Walk Test of ground fault circuit testing shall be verified by operating the Notification Appliances for 4 seconds. f. Optionally, the Walk Test sequence shall have the capability of activating NACs to signal with a code associated with the alarmed zone. If this option is selected, any momentary opening of initiating or NAC wiring shall cause the notification appliances to sound for 4 seconds to indicate the trouble condition. The Walk Test feature shall automatically revert to the normal operating mode after eight (8) hours if it is not manually activated. g. Suppliers of systems not having this feature as functionally specified above shall include a testing agreement meeting the requirements of NFPA-72 in their base bid quotation. As a minimum, two (2) years of scheduled testing shall be included. 15. LED Supervision a. All slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location of that LED. 16. Active Status Reminder a. Should any Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble condition be present within the system and the audible signal silenced, the local tone alert shall resound every 8 hours (each change of work shift) to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. 17. Access Levels a. There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Passcodes shall consist of up to four (4) digits. Changes to passcodes shall only be made by authorized personnel. b. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. c. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the entered digits shall not be displayed. d. When a correct passcode is entered, a message indicating acceptance shall be displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or leaves the keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes. e. When an incorrect passcode is entered, a message shall be displayed indicating that the passcode was invalid Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx Trouble Acknowledge Alarm Silence System Reset 18. ALARM SEQUENCE a.The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch is to be as follows: b. All audible alarm notification appliances shall sound as required by local authority having jurisdiction. c. All visible alarm notification appliances: Xenon Strobes shall display a continuous synchronized pattern. d. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release. e. A supervised signal to notify the local fire department or an approved central station is to be activated. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, the type of "city connection circuit" is to be determined by the fire alarm equipment supplier and all city tie connection equipment supplied as required. f. An alarm is to be displayed on the panel display as defined in the OPERATION section of these specifications. The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the remote annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged at the control panel or the remote annunciator. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information. g. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel and the remote annunciator until acknowledged. h. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel shall reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system is to resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification is to operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation is to be selectable by zone. i. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone has gone into a verification mode. j. The control panel is to have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch. k. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve tamper switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel and the remote annunciator. Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on fire alarm initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. l. A combination waterflow indicator/sprinkler supervisory switch combination IDC type shall be selected allowing a single pair of wires to monitor both conditions. Waterflow monitor shall have priority over sprinkler supervisory monitoring. m. Activating the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Switch shall silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED on indication that the tamper contact is still in the off- normal state. n. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal. o. A manual evacuation means shall be provided to activate the system NACs. p. Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system, the operator shall be able to manually scroll to display new alarms. The first 10 fire alarm zones in alarm shall be displayed simultaneously in chronological order. q. The system shall have an alarm list means that shall allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of the most recent alarm and may also indicate the path that the fire is taking. r. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release upon AC power failure. s. The control panel shall be capable of supplying 4 Amps @ 24 VDC power output for external system use including power for NACs. t. An additional internally mounted power supply rated at 5 Amps @ 24 VDC shall be provided. as required to service initiating circuits. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx b. There shall be sprinkler supervisory initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler valve tamper switches to perform the Supervisory Service Operation. This independent initiation circuit shall be labeled Supervisory Service and shall differentiate between tamper switch activation and wiring faults. c. There shall be sufficient (number as required) independently supervised and independently fused NACs for audible notification appliances horns, and visible notification appliances. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits. d. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. e. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. f. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. g. Additional monitoring shall be provided to initiate a depleted battery warning at the panel when battery operation has exceeded the battery capacity. h. The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected from the controls, the system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound. i. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes. Restoration of a disabled circuit displays the status of the circuit and initiates a count down timer allowing the operator to “Abort the Enable” to prevent unwanted activation of notification appliances, off-premise reporting, and emergency controls. j. The count down timer shall be programmable from the front panel to be from 0 to 60 minutes. E. POWER REQUIREMENTS 1. The control panel shall receive power as noted on the plans via a dedicated, fused disconnect circuit. 2. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal AC mains power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of sixty (60) hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. 3. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. F. QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer: The Manufacturer shall be a nationally recognized company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems. This organization shall employ factory trained and NICET certified technicians, and shall maintain a service organization within 60 miles of this project location. The Manufacturer and service organization shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the fire protective signaling systems industry. 2. Installer: The installation organization shall be a company specializing in the installation of smoke detection and] fire alarm systems. This organization shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with installation of fire protective signaling systems. The fire protective signaling system shall be installed by NICET certified installers. 3. The Organization supplying final check-out, contractual service and testing, shall be Listed and Authorized by UL to provide services for alarm system Certification as a means of identifying compliance with applicable NFPA Standards. G. SUBMITTALS 1. Submit Manufacturer product data sheets for all proposed devices and equipment. 2. Provide wiring diagrams, equipment ratings, dimensions, and finishes for all proposed devices and equipment. 3. If submittals, upon review by the Owner and/or the Owners Representative, are found not to conform with the performance, type and quality of products as well as all other requirements of these specifications; the Contractor shall be required to resubmit. The Contractor shall be responsible for the Owner's extra expenses for subsequent review(s) of rejected submittals. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. Approval of the submittals by the Owner shall, in no case, relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to meet the requirements of this specification. H. PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set of approved shop Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx I. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Submit Manufacturer data sheets for all equipment installed. 2. Include operating, installation, and routine maintenance instructions. 3. Include Manufacturer letter stating the date of installation on which the system is operational. J. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Other equipment may be substituted as long as the level of quality and performance of operation is equal to, or greater than, that which is specified. The Owner and/or Owners Representative shall make the determination as to whether or not the substitute equipment is acceptable. K. FIRE DETECTION AND CONTROL PANEL 1. Where shown on the plans, provide and install a Simplex type 4004 Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics. 2. A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory conditions. This audible device shall pulse to indicate alarm conditions and shall be on steadily for Supervisory or Trouble conditions. 3. Primary Keys & Panel Display a. The Control Panel's display shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or there should be keypad activity. b. The display shall support both upper and lower case letters. Lowercase letters shall be used for softkey titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for System Status Information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information. 4. The fire alarm control panel cabinet shall provide the following features: a. The fire alarm control panel shall be housed in a single cabinet capable of housing the maximum of expansion and optional modules required for system feature upgrading or system expansion. b. The cabinet shall be equipped with lock and transparent door panel providing freedom from tampering yet allowing full view of the various displays and pertinent operator controls. c. The printed circuit board assemblies of the control panel shall be mounted such that removal of a common, single piece mounting chassis shall provide access for installing the cabinet and for pulling wires into the cabinet. d. Provisions for semi-flush mounting between 24 inch center stud wall construction. e. Cabinet color shall be beige. f. To facilitate installation, the cabinet shall provide: 1) Built-In depth gauges for ½ inch thick drywall installation. 2) Built-In knockouts for nail holes and wiring conduit entrance. 3) A built-in trim band to allow semi-flush mounting into rough cut wall openings. L. INITIATING DEVICES Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following signal initiating devices: 1. Stations: Furnish and install type 2099-9756 double action manual pull stations with raised white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. The break-glass station shall have a hinged front with key lock. Stations which utilize screwdrivers, allen wrenches, or other commonly available tools shall not be accepted. Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control panel. When the station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate quick visual identification of the activated station. Provide type 2099-9800 red wire guards where shown on drawings. 2. Thermodetectors: Furnish and install white, low-profile, type 2098-9443 thermodetectors rated at 135o rate of rise and fixed temperature in all areas except where noted on the drawings, which shall be type 2098- 9445 rated at 135o fixed temperature. 3. Smoke Detectors: Furnish and install type 2098-9201, ceiling mounted, photoelectric smoke detectors. Detector shall have a completely closed back to restrict entry of dust and air turbulence and 30 mesh insect screen. Electronics of unit shall be shielded to protect against false alarms from E.M.I. and R.F.I. Unit shall contain a red LED which shall pulse to indicate power on and which shall glow continuously to indicate alarm. Detector shall have a magnetically operated functional test switch and be capable of being supplied with a remote alarm LED indicator. Unit shall have a separate mounting base with terminal strip for ease of wiring, changing and cleaning. Remote Alarm Indicator shall be type 2098-9808 with a red light emitting diode (LED) mounted on a single gang stainless steel plate. 4. Duct Smoke Detectors: Furnish and install type 2098-9649 photoelectric duct smoke detector. Duct housing base assembly shall be provided with an auxiliary relay with Form C contacts, rated at 1 AMP. Necessary sampling tubes shall be provided across the entire width of duct work. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx retard chamber to compensate for water surge. 6. Sprinkler System Gate Valve Supervisory Switch: Shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 of the Specification and wired under this Section of the Specification. M. ALARM INDICATING DEVICES Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following audio/visual devices: 1. Audio/Visual Device shall be Simplex type 4903 series (rectangular style), semi-flush on a standard electrical outlet box. A common mounting bezel shall contain the horn and high intensity xenon strobe flashing light. The side viewing white translucent lens shall have the word "FIRE" in red imprinted on it. Flash rate shall be 1 flash per second with an 15/75 candela flash intensity or as marked on drawing. Both audio and visual units shall be on the same supervised circuit or circuits. The horn shall be rated at 87 db sound pressure level at ten (10) feet. Device shall be U.L. 1971 listed. All audio/visual units will include a synchronized flash module. All power supplies will be sized to appropriately account for synchronized flash power consumption. 2. Visual only units will be Simplex type 4904 series similar to as specified above. N. REMOTE DEVICES Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, the following remote devices: 1. Slave Fan Relays: Furnish and install type 2088-9008 fan relay with required contacts. Cabinet shall have a screw on cover. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 AMP resistive. O. CONDUIT AND WIRE: 1. Conduit: a. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements and as described elsewhere in this specification. b. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or approved metallic raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit. c. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-29. d. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals. e. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer. f. Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying all conduit fill requirements. Conduit cross sectional conductor fill shall not exceed 40% under any circumstances. 2. Wire: a. All fire alarm system wiring as installed under this contract shall be new “Fire Wire” from FACP to device. b. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 14 AWG for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG for notification appliance circuits. c. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system. d. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 3. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. All junction boxes shall be painted red. 4. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to intelligent reporting device. P. INSTALLATION 1. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate Subcontractors. 2. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation. 3. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and/or labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be maintained throughout the installation. Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 8 of 8 Q. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72, Chapter 7, [and local Fire Department requirements,] by the Installer, in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the Installer shall so certify, in writing, to the Owner and General Contractor. 2. The Manufacturer shall provide on-site technical installation support. R. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 1. Include on-site services of a NICET certified technician to provide technical installation support for panel start up, program editing, troubleshooting of the Fire Protective Signaling System Control Panel, and assistance to the Installer for one complete final system checkout in accordance with the Field Quality Control section of these specifications. The Manufacturer shall also provide one training session with the Owner, or Owners Representatives, upon completion of installation, for instruction of system operation. S. FIRE ALARM WIRING 1. All wiring shall be color coded as follows and must be installed within conduit: a. Fire alarm control panel - 120 Volt - 2 #12 AWG. b. Alarm initiating devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone, one (1) brown, on (1) violet. c. Horn devices - 2 #14 AWG per circuit. One (1) red, one (1) black. d. Visual devices - on same circuit as horn devices. e. Slave fan relay - 2 #14 AWG blue wires from fire alarm control panel to fan relay. f. Magnetic door holder device - 2 #14 AWG yellow wires from fire alarm control panel to holders. g. Remote annunciator/graphic device - 2 #14 and 1 pair #18 AWG. All wires #14 AWG and properly identified at control panel and annunciator locations. 2. Install and connect conduit and wiring from fire alarm control panel to telephone terminal cabinet for central station tie. 3. All junction boxes used with the fire alarm system will be painted red. 4. Coordinate connections with supplies of central station network system. END OF SECTION Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL REPORT STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS APPENDIX B - Page 1 of 1 Carmel Firestone Store Property No.: XXXXXX 11035 N. Michigan Rd. PROJECT MANUAL Store No.: XXXX/XXXXX Zionsville, IN 46077 Date: 02-18-2009 Job No.: xxxx APPENDIX B STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS APPENDIX B - Page 1 of 1 4. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes, and the Manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall so certify, in writing, to the Owner and the General Contractor. FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 7 of 8 Those Duct Smoke Detectors installed above ceiling or not visible from viewing area shall be furnished with a remote test station type 2098-9806 with a red light emitting diode (LED) mounted on a single gang stainless steel plate. 5. Sprinkler Waterflow Switch: Shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 of the Specification and wired under this Section of the Specification. Switch shall have two (2) sets of N.O. contacts and adjustable FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 6 of 8 drawings. 2. Record drawings shall include location of end-of-line device locations. 3. Upon completion of the work, and final acceptance by the local authority, the Contractor shall submit record drawings to the Owner and the Engineer. FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 5 of 8 19. SUPERVISION a. The system shall contain the number of independently supervised initiation circuits shown on the drawing plus a minimum of two spare circuits so that a fault in any one zone shall not affect any other zone. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 4 of 8 f. Access to a level shall only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels. g. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: Alarm Acknowledge Supervisory Acknowledge FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 3 of 8 a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall step the user through the reset process with simple English language messages. Messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (i.e.: "IN PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED", and "SYSTEM NORMAL") as they occur, should all alarm FIRE ALARM 16721 - Page 2 of 8